JP6535232B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention, when the result of the variable display game variably displaying a plurality of identification information reaches a predetermined result, relates to a gaming machine capable of generating predetermined game state capable imparting game value to Yu technique's.

  In the conventional gaming machine, the processing of the special view 2 variable display game is preferentially executed over the processing of the special view 1 variable display game (for example, Patent Document 1).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-099315

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 described above, a problem occurs when performing the simultaneous change in which the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are simultaneously executed.

  An object of the present invention is to prevent a problem from occurring even when performing such simultaneous change.

In one representative form of the present invention, the game control means is capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed on the display device based on establishment of the start condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a hit result mode In the gaming machine capable of generating a predetermined gaming state capable of giving a gaming value to the player, the game control means performs execution control of the first variation display game based on the establishment of the first start condition. A first control means; and a second control means for performing execution control of a second variable display game based on establishment of a second start condition, wherein the first variable display game by the first control means, and Both the second variable display game by the second control means can be in the running state, and one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, one of the variable display games hits and results Aspect If the second variable display game is interrupted by stopping the update of the clock means for measuring the execution time of the other variable display game, the second variable display game is generated when the hit result mode is reached. When the predetermined gaming state ends, the other variable display game is resumed by resuming the updating of the clock means, and the process of stopping the variable display of the one variable display game in a result manner is executed. At the time, the process of interrupting the variable display of the other variable display game is executed, and the game control program including the interrupt process is executed after the execution control of the first control means. And the second variable display game is executed when the first variable display game is hit and the second variable display game is interrupted. In the first variation display game, in the case where the time counting means is updated for the time of one interruption cycle while the second variation display game is a hit result mode and the first variation display game is interrupted. The clocking means for clocking the execution time is not updated .

According to an embodiment of the present invention can be adapted not to trouble even when performing simultaneous variation occurs.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a package display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of the various display parts of a package display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of a special figure 1 display. It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of a special figure 2 display. It is another figure which shows the lighting aspect of the special figure 2 display. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game control device. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of an effect control system of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the main processing of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of input processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a switch read-in process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of payment command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process. It is a time chart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change surveillance processing. It is another time chart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change surveillance processing. It is a further another time chart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change surveillance processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting opening 1 switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting opening 2 switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 usual process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 usual process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hit judging processing. It is a table which illustrates a big hit probability, a small hit probability and an out probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of high probability fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 1 in-process change processing setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process shift setting process in the special figure 2 during fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 1 change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during a special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during a special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 2 during a special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 2 during a special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process in process of special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the process in process of special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of a process in process of special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing shift setting processing during fan fare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of special processing 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting process. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing shift setting processing 2 during big winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a big winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit fanfare middle process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit middle process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hitting remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 small hitting end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of design change control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a board | substrate electric wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting opening 1 signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of main prize ball | bowl signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of symbol fixed frequency signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows a modification of processing during special figure 1 change. It is a flow chart which shows a modification of processing during special figure 2 change. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the first half of single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of a one-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change suspension setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change resumption setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows pre-reading symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch change type | system | group command processing. It is a flowchart which shows symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of change suspension setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change resumption setting processing. It is a time chart (timing chart) which shows a mode that the fluctuation display game is forcedly terminated. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a fluctuation display game is interrupted and resumed. (A) It is a time chart which shows the case where the variation time timer of a special figure 2 variation display game is updated at the time of a stop of a special figure 1 variation display game. (B) It is a time chart which shows the case where it does not update. (A) Special figure 1 It is a time chart which shows a mode that the delay timer (wait time) which delays restart of a fluctuation display game is not set. (B) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the delay timer (wait time) which delays restart of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (A) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the delay timer (wait time) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set irrespective of the state of the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. (B) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the delay timer (wait time) which delays restart of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not set. It is a time chart which shows processing when there is a possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may end at the same timing. It is a time chart which shows an example of processing when there is a power failure during interruption of a variable display game, and a power failure is restored after that (power-on). It is a time chart which shows the other example of processing when there is a power failure during interruption of a variable display game, and a power failure is restored after that (power on).

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed from the player in the game.

[General view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable / closable and pivotable via a hinge. The opening and closing frame is constituted by a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  While the game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that enables visual recognition of the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, access to the game control device (main substrate) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30 Can.

  Various frame components are disposed at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are disposed. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate therein illumination members such as LEDs, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members disposed inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 8).

  An upper speaker 19a is disposed at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19 b are provided below the gaming machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19 a. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds and the like.

  In the right side portion of the glass frame 15, a projection effect unit 13 which is extended in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and which protrudes toward the front (player side) is disposed. The projecting effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emitting effect and the like according to the progressing state of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

  An upper tray unit having an upper tray 21 capable of storing gaming balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball launcher (not shown).

  The upper unit further includes a rendering operation device for receiving an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device for receiving an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 for performing a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operating device is an operating device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

  By the player operating the effect operating device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special view variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select a rendering pattern (rendering mode) or to execute a preview rendering for previewing in advance the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special view variable display game, and in the case where the variable display game is simply used, this specification refers to the special view variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operating device during the non-execution.

  The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a state (probability change state, probability fluctuation state), a big hit state (special game state) in which the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, big hit) is high in a specific game state (time reduction state) , It is a small hit game state (small hit state).

  Here, the probability change state continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until the variable number display game is performed a predetermined number of times (count number type, ST), and a predetermined probability fall lottery There are things (continuation lottery type) etc. which continue until it is won.

  Furthermore, it is possible to always generate a positive change state when a big hit occurs, without deciding whether or not to generate a positive change state by a big hit symbol random number, or by providing a winning device etc. provided with a specific area If the gaming ball passes through the area, a definite change state may be generated.

  The ball lending operating device is an operating device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operating device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is a card unit (not shown) disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 10 for discharging a prepaid card or the like. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED, etc., and is a device that performs light emission effects and the like according to the game state, and is provided on the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball emitting device (not shown) and a gaming ball can be stored under the glass frame 15 provided with the above-described upper tray unit etc. and under the front frame 12 A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19 b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the gaming board 30. The firing speed of the gaming ball to be fired from the ball launching device is set to be faster as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 is larger. That is, the ball launcher can change the launch force (speed) for firing the game ball to the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game is performed in various launch modes with different launch rates. I can shoot a ball. The firing modes include a left strike (normal strike) in which the gaming ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and a right strike in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower tray 23 is disposed below the upper tray unit at a predetermined distance from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removing hole 23a penetrating the bottom of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an open / close operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball removing hole 23a. The player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, whereby the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Play board]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 2, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 30 a that is a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a gaming ball from a ball launch device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31. A windmill, an obstacle nail or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  A center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached substantially at the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variation display device) that variably displays (variable display) a plurality of identification information is disposed. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is disposed such that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each of the variable display areas. In addition, an image (a big hit display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a warp passage 40a for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b on which the game balls having passed the warp passage 40a can roll. It is done. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the first start winning opening 36 and the second start winning opening 37, the gaming ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is the first start winning opening 36 or the second start winning opening 36 (2) It is easy to win the start winning opening 37.

  An upper rendering unit 40c and a side rendering unit 40d are provided on the upper portion and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 8) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 8).

  A general winning opening 35 is disposed in the left lower gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also disposed in the right lower gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 7) provided on the general winning opening 35.

  The first start winning opening (first start winning area, special figure 1 starting opening, starting opening 1) 36 for giving start conditions (starting conditions) of the special view variation display game to the game area 32 below the center case 40 Is provided. When the player strikes the left (normal hit), the gaming ball easily wins (enters) the first start winning opening 36. In the right lower gaming area 32 of the center case 40, a second starting winning opening (second starting winning area, special figure 2 starting opening, starting opening 2) 37 is provided. At the time of right strike, the gaming ball is more likely to win (enter) the second start winning opening 37. When the gaming ball wins the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37, the special view variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  In the gaming area 32 below the second start winning opening 37, the lower large winning opening is opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling to the near side by the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7) There is provided a first special variation winning device 38 (special electric symbol) having an open / close door 38c. The first special variation winning device 38 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocked condition disadvantageous to the player) to open condition (playing condition advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and By facilitating the flow of the game ball into the big winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the lower large winning opening, a lower large winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 7) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening.

  In addition, in the game area 32 at the upper left of the center case 40, the upper large winning opening is opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling to the front side by the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7). A second special variation winning device 39 (special electric combination) having an open / close door 39c is provided. Similar to the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39 closes the big winning opening by the result of the special view variation display game (blockage which is disadvantageous for the player) (the player is closed) The player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball) by converting the game state to the advantageous game state) and facilitating the flow of the game ball into the upper large winning opening. In the upper large winning opening, an upper large winning opening switch 39a (see FIG. 7) (two in the present embodiment) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening.

  The game balls are prized in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the lower special winning opening of the first special variation winning device 38, and the upper special winning aperture of the second special changing winning device 39 Then, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) discharges, from the payout device, the number of winning balls according to the type of winning opening that has won a prize, to the upper tray 21. In addition, in the gaming area 32 below the first special variation winning device 38, an out port 30b is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize.

  Also, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the gaming board main body 30a, the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 1 game), special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2) A collective display 50 is provided to execute the game). The collective display device 50 includes display portions D1 to D20 that display information such as the current gaming state (see FIG. 3).

  FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the batch display device 50. As shown in FIG. The collective display device 50 is a first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (special view 1 display) (lamp D1) and a second special view for a variable display game configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. And a variation display unit 52 (special view 2 display) (lamp D2). In addition, the collective display unit 50 displays the number of rounds at the big hit (number of opening and closing times of the special fluctuation winning devices 38 and 39) and the round display unit 53 (lamps D3-D7) for displaying the occurrence of small hits, and the special view 1 fluctuation display It has the memory | storage display part 54 (special figure 1 reservation display) (lamps D11-D14) for starting (pending) memory number notification of a game.

  Furthermore, the first gaming state display unit 55 (first gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) that displays on the collective display device 50 that the winning probability state is the high probability state (lamps D15 to D18) ), The second game status display unit 56 (second game status indicator) (lamps D8 to D10) that lights up when a big hit or a small hit occurs and notifies that it is time to hit right (when it should hit right) It is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 displays a third game state display unit 57 (third game state display unit 57 indicating that the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game is being interrupted corresponding to a modification described later. And an interruption state display unit) (lamps D19 and D20).

  FIG. 4 is a view showing lighting modes of various display portions 53-57 (lamps D3-D20) constituting the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. The collective display device 50 displays the state of the gaming machine corresponding to the lighting mode of the various display portions 53-57. The round display unit 53 (lamps D3 to D7) lights up according to the number of rounds, and the storage display unit 54 (lamps D11 to D14) lights up according to the number of reservations (number of start memories). The first gaming state display unit 55 (lamps D15-D18) lights up in a high probability state, turns off in a low probability state, and the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) lights up when you hit the right, Turns off when hitting left (normal hitting).

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the special view change display game will be described. In the present embodiment, a common drawing start gate is not provided, and a so-called common drawing variation display game is not executed. The second start winning opening 37 is not provided with a movable member for opening and closing the second start winning opening 37.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by striking a gaming ball from a ball launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36, the second Either the start winning hole 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 wins, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32, and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, A corresponding number of winning balls are discharged to the upper tray 21 through the dispensing device.

  As a basic game method, in the normal game state, the player makes the first start winning hole 36 win a game ball by left-handing, the special view 1 variation display game starts, and small hit / big hit, probability change state, etc. As a result, the player switches to the right and aims at the second start winning opening 37 and the upper winning opening. The display device 41 can display an instruction to instruct whether the player should hit left or right, and when the player does not follow the instruction, an error is notified by the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b. It is possible.

  The winning of the first starting winning opening 36 of the gaming ball and the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 7) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7). The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as a starting winning ball for the special view 1 variation display game, and is stored within a predetermined upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment). The game ball winning 37 is detected as a start winning ball for the special view 2 variable display game, and is stored within a predetermined upper limit number (1 in this embodiment).

  When detecting the start winning balls of the special view variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted. These random number values are each for a predetermined number of times as special figure start winning memory storage (special figure start memory) in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 (for example, maximum at special figure 1 fluctuation display game) 4 times) is stored to the limit. The storage number of the special figure 1 start winning memory (special figure 1 start memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 for informing the start winning number of the collective display 50 and also on the display screen of the display 41 Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as described later, the special figure 2 variation display game can be simultaneously executed (in execution) independently of the special figure 1 variation display game, and further, the special figure 2 variation The special figure 2 start winning in the display game execution and the big hit etc. is nullified (the detection of the start opening 2 switch 37a is nullified). Therefore, the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is not accumulated, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started as soon as the special figure 2 start winning memory is generated. That is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not performed at the timing when the gaming ball has won the second start winning opening 37, the variation start condition (start condition) of the special figure 2 variation display game is satisfied. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 start winning memory number is configured not to be displayed on the batch display device 50 or the display device 41. In addition, the structure which displays the special figure 2 start winning memory number on the package display apparatus 50 or the display apparatus 41 is also possible.

  The game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) with the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning or the first start memory on the first start winning opening 36. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) with the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning on the second start winning opening 37 or the second start memory. Do.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are identification information (special symbol 1 (special figure 1), special symbol 2 (special figure 2)) in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 After fluctuating the predetermined result mode.

  In the present embodiment, the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game can be made to be independently (simultaneously) running simultaneously with each other, but a big hit or a small hit is generated in one special view variation display game. When it occurs (the special result or the specific result is derived and displayed in a stopped state), the other running special feature variation display game is forcibly stopped at the out-of-focus result.

  In the normal gaming state, when the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 37 by right-handed, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts fluctuation, but basically the long time fluctuation (long fluctuation, for example 10 minutes) Since it is performed, it is forcedly stopped by a big hit or a small hit generated in the special view 1 variable display game during this time.

  FIG. 5 is a view showing a lighting mode of the 7-segment display (lamp D1) constituting the special view 1 display 51. As shown in FIG. The special view 1 variation display game is executed by a variation display which repeats turning on and off of identification information (here, a central segment and a point portion in this case) on a special view 1 display 51. The stop display (off symbol, off display) of the disconnection result of the special view 1 variation display game is a display in which the central segment and the point portion are lit. The stop display (big hit symbol, big hit display) of the big hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, multiple displays corresponding to the number of rounds (R) of the big hit and the gaming state after the big hit (normal state or probability change state) Symbol) can be present. There are multiple types of stop display (small hit symbol, small hit display) of the small hit results of the special figure 1 variation display game, but the opening pattern (open time etc.) of the big winning opening by the small hit is one same type Special figure 1 small hit) only.

  In the present embodiment, all the big hit types continue until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the probability change state ends the big hit. That is, the gaming machine is an ST (special time) machine, and the jackpot symbol is only a probability variation symbol.

  6A and 6B are diagrams showing lighting modes of the 7-segment display (lamp D1) constituting the special view 2 display 52. FIG. The special view 2 variation display game is executed by a variation display which repeats turning on and off of identification information (here, the center segment and the point portion here) on the special view 2 display 52. The stop display (outside symbol, outright display) of the outlier result of the special view 2 fluctuation display game is a display in which the central segment is lit. The stop display (big hit symbol, big hit display) of the big hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, multiple displays corresponding to the number of rounds of big hit (R) and the game state after the big hit (normal state or probability change state) Symbol) can be present. There are multiple types of stop display (small hit symbol, small hit display) of the small hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, there are 3 types of open patterns (open time etc.) of the big winning opening by the small hit (special figure 2 small hits, 1, 2, 3). In addition, special figure 2 small hits 1, 2 and 3, the big winning opening which is opened (upper large winning a prize opening or lower large winning a prize opening) may differ, depending on small hitting design upper large winning a prize opening or lower large winning a prize opening Either one will be released in a predetermined release pattern.

  Further, in the display device 41, a decorative special view variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special view variation display game is executed.

  In the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) The variable display (scroll display) is started in the order of d), and symbols which are changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped to display the result of the special figure change display game. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest.

  When winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), the special figure fluctuation display game As a result of the above, a special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol and becomes a big hit state (special game state). Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

  In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 and / or the second special variation winning device 39 are operated by energizing the lower large winning opening solenoid (38b) and / or the upper large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 7). The big winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds or several tens of seconds). That is, the large winning opening provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 opens widely until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of gaming balls win, during which time the player takes many gaming balls. It has the benefit of being able to be earned.

  When the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is a small hit value), the special view fluctuation display As a result of the game, a specific result aspect (small hit result aspect) is derived by the display symbol, and becomes a small hit state. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

  In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 and / or the second special variation winning device 39 is a large winning opening by energizing the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b and / or the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7). Is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 2 seconds or less).

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that the specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device (the first special fluctuation winning device 38 and / or the second special fluctuation winning device 39) continuously is set. If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special fluctuation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, while in the case of a small hit, the small hitting flag is set, the special fluctuation winning device Is released.

  In addition, although the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are comprised as a separate display, each special figure fluctuation display game may take the execution state (state currently being performed) simultaneously, If a big hit or a small hit occurs in the special view variation display game of (when a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed for a stop), the other special view variation display game under execution is forced to be out of the result Stop.

  With regard to the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on different display devices or separate display areas, or the same indication It may be executed in the device or the display area. In addition, although the special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may simultaneously be in an execution state (a state of being executed), one ornament special figure variation display game When a big hit or a small hit occurs in the (when a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed for a stop), the other decorative special feature variation display game being executed is forced to stop at the out result.

  In the following description, when the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a special view change display game.

  Further, although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the second start winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (38a, 39a) uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) which has a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. It is done. In addition, a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. It is possible to use a microswitch having various contacts.

[Game control device]
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a game control system of the game machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock serving as an operation clock of the CPU, timer interrupts, and a random number generation circuit. Oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V, and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of lower levels such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from a voltage of 32 V DC. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal notifying the game control apparatus 100 of the occurrence of power failure and recovery. And the like, and a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the gaming control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate substrate or gaming control device 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply 400 or the main board. By providing it, it can be removed from the target of replacement and the cost can be reduced.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111 c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. To be done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a random access memory (RAM) 111c which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores unchanged information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a working area of the CPU 111a and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111 b or the RAM 111 c.

  Further, the ROM 111 b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display areas of all the variable display areas are temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle and right variable display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the state (1) except that the special result aspect is a reach state, and display the remaining one variable display area from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as a line of reach effects, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP 1 reach) , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is high as compared with the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit of the special pattern variation display game, a big hit random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number, etc. for determining a pattern random number, a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (including an execution time of the variation display game in various reach and variation display without reach) And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. .

  Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one fluctuation pattern table from among a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a is a game result (big hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired based on the above. Here, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the fluctuation pattern tables among the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the rental ball request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for dispensing the rental balls.

  In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, and the second start winning opening 37 The switch is connected to the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variation winning device 38, the upper special winning switch 39a of the second special variation winning device 39, and supplied from these switches An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V and converts the signal into a 0 V-5 V positive logic signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower large winning opening switch 38a, and the upper large winning opening switch 39a are the third input port 124 Is input to

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the second input port 123.

  In addition, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 in the second input port 123, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 A signal from a front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12, etc. is input. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control apparatus 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by the enable signal CE2 being asserted (changed to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout, and an overflow. A first input port 122 is provided which takes in an overflow switch signal and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The frame radio wave unauthorized signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command or not. It is a signal. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 for a predetermined amount or more (full).

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for outputting to the test injection test device. Is configured as.

  In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test injection test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass the buffer. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay substrate 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (lower large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the first special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid (upper large winning opening) opening the second special fluctuation winning device 39. A second output port 134 is provided to output open / close data of the solenoid 39b.

  The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives open / close data signals of the lower large winning opening solenoid 38 b and the upper large winning opening solenoid 39 b output from the second output port 134 to generate and output a solenoid drive signal (a first driver (drive Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, a batch display device output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an ON / OFF drive signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of 50, and an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71 A driver 138d is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply apparatus 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

[Effect control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 is supplied with a program ROM 321 consisting of a program (program for effect control) executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and power during power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding the stored contents without any connection, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights the decoration lamp, and the motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. A decoration control command signal (rendering command) such as a decoration special drawing reserve number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the rendering control device 300 via the command I / F 331 Receive as. Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls a device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect).

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, you may provide the frame production movable body control circuit which drive-controls frame production apparatuses, such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, a motor in the panel effect device 44 A function to detect the on / off state of the effect combination object switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting an initial position etc. and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to

  Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.

  A start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, and based on the starting memory, the big hit determination of the special view 1 variation display game The random number value for extraction is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / off of the special view 1 variation display game.

  In addition, starting memory is remembered on the basis of the input of the detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 2 switch 37a which is equipped in 2nd starting winning a prize opening 37, special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory disorder for special figure 2 fluctuation indication game based on starting memory A numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / off of the special view 2 variation display game.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52, a special view fluctuation display game in which a stop display is performed is displayed. That is, the game control for performing the progress control of the variable display game based on the winning of the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 37) of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 Make a means.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  And, when the result of the special view fluctuation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result aspect on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52, and the special game state (big hit) State) is generated. In the processing for generating the special gaming state, for example, the CPU 111a opens the open / close door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, or the movable of the second special variation winning device 39 by the big winning opening solenoid 39b. Control is performed to open the member 39c and allow the game ball to flow into the big winning opening.

  Then, whether a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, about 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening One round is to open the big winning opening until any condition is achieved, and this is repeated (for example, 16 times, 8 times, 4 times or 2 times) control (cycle game) )I do. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being hit result (big hit result in this embodiment) in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state (low probability state). In addition, the high probability state and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) based on the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game Even in the case, both the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are in a high probability state.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed so that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes short. In the present embodiment, the high probability state and the short time state are configurations that occur simultaneously, but it is also possible to enable generation independently of each other and to generate only one of them.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (milliseconds in this embodiment)). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control process of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main process and an interrupt process program (interrupt process routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt process. .

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. 9A and 9B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the game control apparatus 100. The main process is started by turning on the power. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "A ****" or "S ****".

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the main processing is started, the gaming control apparatus 100 first executes processing for prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is performed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area for saving the values of the register etc. when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs a signal of release prohibition and sets the release permission signal to a release state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the gaming ball is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets a power on delay timer (A1007). The slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power on delay timer. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) boots up, and the slave control apparatus Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  When the power on delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes counting of the standby time and processing of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus ( A1008) It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. It judges (A1010). Then, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks is not continued (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on in step A1009.

  In addition, when the on state of the blackout monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the blackout has occurred, the gaming control apparatus 100 is a gaming machine. Wait until the power is turned off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when no power failure occurs, the game control device 100 updates the power on delay timer by -1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control apparatus 100 can read and write RWM (read-write such as RAM or EEPROM). Memory access is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a serial port (a port provided in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control apparatus 300 and the payout control apparatus 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Furthermore, it is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the blackout inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal blackout inspection area check data. (A1017). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the blackout inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 executes checksum calculation processing for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019) Then, it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the process of step A1021 of FIG. 9B, and the process in the case of normal recovery (recovery) from the power failure is executed.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N”) Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1023 of FIG. 9B and initialization processing is performed. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are areas related to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area (disbursement busy signal flag area) storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is It is in an undetermined state indicating that it has not been determined.

  Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special view status is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1022), and the process of step A1028 is executed. Commands at the time of recovery from power failure include model specification commands indicating the type of gaming machine, decorative special drawing 1 commands indicating the number of reservations in special view 1, probability information commands indicating the state of probability, commands for screen specification, etc. . The command for screen specification is a command for specifying the display content of the display device 41. For example, when both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being processed normally (if they are not in fluctuation or hit or hit) There is a wait for demo command, and a recovery screen command otherwise.

  Moreover, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended as in the modification of the later-described FIG. 82 to FIG. In case there is a special figure game interruption flag), including an interruption command (interruption command) indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted Good.

  On the other hand, when executing the processing of step A1023 after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control apparatus 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1023). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1024), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1025).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of the RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1026). The area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demo area and the effect mode. Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and executes the processing of step A1028. The commands at the time of RAM initialization include a model specification command, an ornament special drawing 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a command for RAM initialization, and the like. The command for RAM initialization causes the effect control device 300 to display a customer waiting demo on the screen of the display device 41, and notifies of the RAM initialization with the panel decoration device 46 and the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the upper speakers 19a and 19b. Do it (for example 30 seconds).

  In addition, the command at the time of power failure restoration transmitted at the processing of step A1022 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted at the processing of step A1027 further include a rendering mode information command indicating the status of the rendering mode depending on the model, time saving status The time reduction information command indicating the number of remaining games at is included.

  The game control apparatus 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1028). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1028, the game control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1029). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111a. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) The random number 1 and the big hit symbol random number 2)) are saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1030), and an interrupt is permitted (A1031). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1032). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" which is updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are timer interrupt processing units of program processing. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the same cycle CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing).

  Also, for the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is employed in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step A1032, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read and checked via the port and data bus (A1033). It is determined whether the signal is on (A1034). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1034 is "N"), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1032. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (A1031) before the initial value random number update process (A1032), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initially performed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by being made to wait by the value random number update process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, if the method is adopted, the initial value random number update processing in step A1032 In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. On the other hand, when the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. Rather, it has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks set in the processing of step A1033. It judges (A1035). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (the result of A1035 is "N"), the process returns to step A1034, and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1035 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 interrupts once. Is inhibited (A1036), and off data is output to all output ports (A1037).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection region 1 (A1038), and saves the power failure inspection region check data 2 in the power failure inspection region 2 (A1039). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum at the time of power supply interruption of the RWM (A1040), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1041). Finally, processing for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1042), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

  As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1040 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the head address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and "0" is set as the calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the calculation of the checksum is completed (A1107).

  When the calculation of the checksum is not completed (the result of A1107 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. In addition, when the calculation of the checksum is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the initial value random number updating process. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1032 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

  The game control device 100 updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1201). Then, the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), and the initial value random number update process is ended.

  Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is an initial value of random numbers that determines a big hit stop symbol, and "small hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is an initial value of random numbers that determines a small hit stop symbol. It is.

  As described above, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be improved.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process (interrupt process program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, the game control apparatus 100 first designates register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches, and capturing of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b) is executed (A1304). When the signal of emission prohibition is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the emission permission signal is output by the output processing being performed, and the emission permission signal is set to be in the permission state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in the various processing to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and further, random number update processing 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a, lower large winning opening switch 38a, upper large winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of an error A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed to determine whether the front frame and the glass frame are open (A1308).

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a starting opening switch monitoring process of monitoring winning of the starting opening by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A1309). Subsequently, a special figure 1 game process for performing a process related to the special figure 1 change display game is executed (A1310), and then a special figure 2 game process for performing a process related to the special figure 2 change display game is executed (A1311). The details of the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes segment LED editing processing which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying special game variation game display and various information related to the game to display desired content. (A1312). The details of the segment LED editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 (A1313). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board (A1314). The details of the magnet fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1315). The details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that although restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of specification of the register bank are performed automatically at the time of timer interrupt processing return, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after external information editing processing. It is also possible to carry out the processing to be performed and the processing to return the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of input processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122 (A1401). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves (stores) the read input port 1, that is, the state of the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, the switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, the switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is ended.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the switch reading process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit requiring the inversion is inverted (A1503), and the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is saved ( Store (A 1504). After that, the process waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the game control apparatus 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1506). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1507), the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (A1508), and the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is saved ( Store (A1509). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit different is 0 in the first and second readings (A1510), the logical bit of the bit pattern and port input state 2 is taken, and this is fixed It is assumed that it is a bit (A1511).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 creates an indeterminate bit pattern in which the state of the same bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first read and the second read (A 1512), and the indeterminate bit pattern and the previous interrupt are generated. The logical product with the fixed state is taken and it is set as the previous hold bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the current determination bit and the previous holding bit, and saves it as the current determination state (A1514). Furthermore, the exclusive OR of the previous and current defined states is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process is ended.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading changes the signal by reading the switch once each for each interrupt processing and comparing with the result of the previous reading. Although there is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been read, it may not be possible to correctly determine if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost until the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (A1304) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first outputs (resets) the off data to the port 135 (see FIG. 7) which outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b are synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the gaming control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the port 135 for segment output (A1608).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 loads and combines data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further combines the combined data and the output data of the release permission (A1610), and finally combines them. The data is output to the external information / fire permission signal output port 137 (A1611). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (A1612). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (A1613).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 The synthesized data is output (A1614). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shooting tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( A 1615). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (A1616), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout command transmission process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A 1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111 c of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

  In these winning number counter areas, for example, 2 winning balls, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 13 winning balls, 14 winning balls according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening. A winning number counter area is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This means that while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 of step A1701, the game control apparatus 100 determines the number of winnings to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number. It is determined whether there is a count number other than "0" in the number counter area.

  When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (the result of A1701 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed (A1703).

  When all checks have been completed (the result of A1703 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the processing of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is "N"), the process returns to the process of step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

  Further, when there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 subtracts the count number of the target number-of-players counter area by 1 (A1704), and the number-of-awards counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address of is acquired (A1705). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved as a new remaining winning balls number in the remaining winning balls area (A1707). As the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before the process of step A1707, a fraction not satisfying the predetermined number serving as the reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). Then, if it is not 0 or more (the result of A1709 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is "Y"), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (A1711) , And further return to the process of step A1708.

  By the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.

  If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 (A1712), and determines whether or not the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is "Y"), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status (flag) is in a busy state (busy state flag) (A1714).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is on (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. It is assumed. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information for setting whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle that can immediately start payout control. A state, a busy state in which the payout control can not be started immediately, or an indeterminate state in which the state is indeterminate are set.

  When the payout busy signal status is busy (result of A1714 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the payout command transmission process. The non-busy state includes the idle state and the indefinite state. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The undefined state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process when the power is turned on. In this undetermined state, the idle state or the busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time in a state indicating that the payout control can or can not be started immediately. Eliminate it with That is, even if a status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is output from the dispensing control device 200 when a power failure occurs and returns from the power outage, the winning ball command is immediately issued to the dispensing control device 200. In response to the status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is continuously output over a predetermined period from the dispensing control device 200 without transmitting, a winning ball command is transmitted to the dispensing control device 200. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

  When the payout busy signal status is not busy (result of A1714 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, the number of counts other than "0" is in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is.

  Then, when there is no count number (the result of A1715 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and all the winning number counter areas are It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (A1717). If all the checks have been completed (the result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is ended. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1717 is “N”), the process returns to the process of step A1715, and the processes from step A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a counted number (the result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts the counted number of the targeted winning number counter area by 1 (A1718), and the targeted winning number counter The payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms, for example, is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, it is possible that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means, which is output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200), can start the payout control can start the payout control. In the case of showing it, it constitutes a winning ball command transmission means for transmitting a winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present embodiment, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the first special variation winning device 38 provided in the gaming area 32) , Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the second special variation prize device 39), and a game based on the prize ball command sent from the game control means A payout control means (dispense control device 200) for performing a payout control of balls, and the game control means is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control. A status signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means when control is performed to send a winning ball command to the payout control means based on (busy signal) and a power failure occurs and returns from the blackout. Is output Even in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without continuously transmitting the winning ball command to the payout control means, the state signal is continuously output for a predetermined period. The winning ball command is to be sent to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 has different winning areas (a first start winning port 36, a second start winning port 37, a general winning port 35, a first special variation winning device 38, a second special variation winning device 39) having different numbers of winning balls. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) can specify the presence / absence of non-transmission of a prize ball command instructing the payout control of the game ball for each number of prize balls, a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) , And the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200). It is made to transmit, and the identification of whether the status signal indicates that the payout control means can start the payout control is preceded by the identification of whether or not there is an unsent winning ball instruction in each winning ball instruction counter. It will be done.

  In addition, while overall game control is performed, the predetermined winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39 Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to) and payout control for performing payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means And means (the payout control device 200), wherein the game control means is capable of starting the payout control in which the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control Means for transmitting the winning ball command to the payout control means (game control apparatus 100), and the number of winning balls for which the payout is determined in accordance with the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area Prize ball including information about Information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the game number (main award ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means comprising a payout control means for outputting the status signal outputted from the payout control means The output of the winning ball signal is performed regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (a first start winning opening 36, a second start winning opening 37, a general winning opening 35). , A prize ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39), and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command of the present invention is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. Can be memorized The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball at a predetermined winning area at the time of winning, and updating the game ball in response to transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area, and outputs the winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and is updated when the gaming ball is prized in the predetermined prize area, By performing updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of winning balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number updating process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A 1801).

  If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing of step A1804 and thereafter. On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

  The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). When the small hitting symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “N”), the random number updating process 1 is ended.

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1804 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads the small hit symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the small hit symbol random number loaded is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number updating process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random number update processing 2 updates It targets and switches the update target each time an interrupt occurs. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is performed for either upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte. Are configured to

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred based on the calculated address (A1903). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter to which a random value is set (A1904).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter, and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “Y”), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the added value ( Hereinafter, this is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the “masked value”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A1907), and the process shifts to the processing of step A1909.

  In addition, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the upper 1 byte to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may be “0”, and “0” is added to avoid that the value does not change.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). Then, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is "Y"), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value and the lower 1 byte of the random value is updated. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process goes to step A1912.

  Whether the game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random number value, and the new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in the process of A1903 It is determined whether or not it is (A1913).

  Then, when the new random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A1913 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the new random number to a lower random number area of 1 byte random number or 2 byte random number. Save (A1915). If the new random number is larger than the upper judgment value (the result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper judgment value from the new random value is taken as a new random value again (A1914). The random number value is saved in the lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (A1915).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). Then, if it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "N"), the random number update process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "Y"), a new random number value (when a new random number value is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and the random number updating process 2 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 111a updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111a is a variation pattern (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of gaming balls into the starting region of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. Function as random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for determining.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed at step A1308 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper large winning opening switch 39a (two pieces) in the upper large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) (A2001). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the big prize port despite the fact that the big prize port is not open and to detect a normal prize (A2002). The details of the fraud & prize monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the fraud monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data to determine whether or not there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of fraudulent prize number area, a fraud prize error notification command, fraud Information on the winning number upper limit value (the number of irregularities judged), the winning opening monitoring table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. Further, in the winning opening monitoring table, information of the monitoring repetition number (number of switches), monitoring switch bit, address of winning number counter area 1 and address of winning number counter area 2 is defined. The fraud monitoring table and the winning opening monitoring table are prepared according to the switches to be monitored.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower large winning opening switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) (A2003). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor the fraudulent prize and to detect a proper prize (A2004).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) which can always be winning (A2005). ) And a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (A2006).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (A2007). In the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process, the number of times of variation (special figure 2 variation number) of the special figure 2 variation display game is counted as the abnormal variation number in the normal gaming state (at the time of low probability) For example, when 5) is reached, the effect control device 300 is made to execute an error notification. The details of the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates a state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose state should be monitored as a target of the current monitoring (A2008 ). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

  Thereafter, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring state according to the value of the state scan counter (A2009). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A 2010). The details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection etc. 1) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (shoot ball out error) based on a shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status based on the payout abnormal status signal (dispense error) Monitoring is set.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a monitoring state according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A 2012).

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status (glass frame open error) based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch Is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state (frame radio wave improper) based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2013). Then, when the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2013 is “N”), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

  In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2013 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A 2014), and does an error occur, etc. The gaming machine state check process is executed to determine the state of (A2015).

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection etc. (switch abnormality 2) Monitoring is set up. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 executes a payout busy signal check process of setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control apparatus 200 can start payout control (A2016). ), And finish the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Since the processing from step A2014 to A2016 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is 0, it is executed at a rate of once for four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2014 to A2016 is performed every 16 ms.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud & prize monitoring process. The fraud & prize monitoring process is executed at steps A2002 and A2004 in the prize hole switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on the lower special winning opening switch 38 a of the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning switch 39 a of the second special variation winning device 39. Since it is easy to perform fraudulently to open the opening and closing member and insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball for the big winning opening (special variation winning devices 38 and 39), monitor fraud as well as detecting the prize. .

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring (A2101), and determines whether or not the fraud monitoring period is underway (A2102). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large winning opening switch 38a. Alternatively, it is a period other than the special gaming state in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the upper large winning opening switch 39a.

  Then, if it is in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning hole switch (A2103). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). Also, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "Y"), the number of incorrect winnings of the target is updated by +1 (A2104), and the number of incorrect winnings after addition is determined to be a target for monitoring It is determined whether it is the number (for example, 5) or more (A2105).

  The reason why the judgment number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. Therefore, it is intended not to judge that the case of winning a prize or the case of noise on a signal is not wrong, and not to judge easily as an error although it is not wrong.

  Then, if the game control device 100 does not have the determined number or more (the result of A2105 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). In addition, if it is more than the judgment number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of wrong winnings is fixed to the number of wrong occurrence judging (A2106), the initial value (for example, 60000ms) is saved in the target wrong prize notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraud generation command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud winning occurrence flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

  On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (result of A2102 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110), and sets the winning balls. The counter updating process is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 loads the notification timer update information of the target (A2112), and determines whether or not the notification timer update is permitted (A2113). If updating of the notification timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, when updating of the notification timer is permitted (the result of A2113 is “Y”), if the notification timer of interest is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is one of the large winning opening switch 39a, and permitted when the winning hole switch subject to error monitoring is the other high winning opening switch 39a. I will not. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as often as the second special variation winning device 39 for fraudulent notification, and prevents time-up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . When the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large winning opening switch 38a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and if the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, if the time is not up. Ends the fraud & prize monitoring process. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, prepare the target fraud release command (A2116), and the fraud flag And prepare a false prize cancellation flag (A2117). Then, it is judged whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  If the value of the notification timer is 0 at the moment when the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, if the value of the notification timer is 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process. Clears the target number of incorrect prizes (A2119).

  In addition, if the game control apparatus 100 does not finish the process of step A2119 or the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize monitoring process before the previous time If the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

  Then, when the prepared injustice flag matches the value of the injustice flag area of the target (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the injustice & prize monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121), and the command setting process is performed. Is executed (A2122). Thereafter, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended.

  By the above processing, an unauthorized occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300 in response to the occurrence of the injustice, and an unauthorized termination command is sent to the effect control device 300 in response to the release of the injustice. The Rukoto.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning number counter updating process. The winning number counter updating process is executed in step A2111 of the fraud & prize monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (accurately, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2212).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads the value of the target number-of-winning counter area 1 (A2203), and the loaded value is +1 is updated (A2204). Furthermore, it is determined whether an overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2205).

  When no overflow occurs (the result of A2205 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After completion of the process of step A2206, or when an overflow occurs (the result of A2205 is "Y"), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2209). When the overflow does not occur (the result of A2209 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After completion of the process of step A2206, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "Y"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches has ended (A2212).

  If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (the result of A2212 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A2202 to determine whether or not there is an input on the target winning opening switch. Further, when the monitoring of all the switches is finished (the result of A2212 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is finished. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Processing command setting process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure of effect command setting processing for setting an effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A2301). Further, it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (A2302).

  In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2302 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2303).

  If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2302 is “Y”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2301.

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A2304), and determines whether the transmission buffer is full (A2305). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2305 is "Y"), the process returns to the process of step A2304.

  In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2305 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2306), and then sets the rendering command. End the process.

  As described above, by transmitting the effect command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. In addition, the timing of command transmission can be advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to capture a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. The special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is executed at step A2007 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A2401). As described later, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set each time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state (including the normal gaming state) in the hitting probability. When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2401 is N), it moves to the processing of step A2407.

  When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 clears the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A2402), and updates the special figure 1 fluctuation number by +1 (A2402) Only one is added (A2403). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than a specified value (for example, 18) (A2404). When the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than specified value (the result of A2404 is “Y”), it moves to the processing of step A2407.

  If special figure 1 fluctuation number is above specified value (result of A2404 being “N”), game control control equipment 100 renews −1 (does not decrease 1) if special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not 0 (A2405) Clear the special figure 1 fluctuation number to 0 (A2406).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether the special view 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A2407). When the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2407 is “N”), it moves to the processing of step A2410. As described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set each time the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state (including the normal gaming state) in the hitting probability.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 clears the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (A2408), and updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number by +1. (A2409). Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than a specified value (for example, 5) (A2410).

  When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is above the specified value (the result of A2410 is “N”), the game control device 100 is the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the specified value used for the determination of step A 2410. Set to (A2411). Next, set an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation informing timer as an error informing timer (A 2412), and prepare a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation generating flag showing the occurrence of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation A2413) The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is prepared as an effect command (A2414), and the process proceeds to step A2419.

  When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A 2410 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer by −1 (A 2415). Next, it is determined whether or not the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer has timed up (A2416). When the time is not up (the result of A 2416 is “N”), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is ended.

  When time is up (result of A2416 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag (A2417), and prepares the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command as a rendering command (A2418) . Next, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (A2419). When the prepared flag is the same as the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (the result of A2419 is "Y"), the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process is ended.

  If the prepared flag is different from the value of the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area at present (result of A2419 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal change cancellation flag or not Are determined (A2420). If the prepared flag is not the release flag (the result of A2420 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2422.

  If the prepared flag is a release flag (result of A2420 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 clears the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number to 0 (A2421). That is, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag is prepared in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area and the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag is set (A2417), the special figure 2 abnormal variation count is cleared to 0. Do. After that, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area in the RWM (A2422). That is, when the prepared flag is different from the flag of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is rewritten to the prepared flag. Next, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2423), and the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is ended.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag showing the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal variation (special figure 2 variation display game abnormal state) is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area, the external information editing process described later As a result, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer). Upon receiving the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command as the effect command, the effect control device 300 executes an error notification on the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

  In the normal gaming state (big hit probability is low probability), the player usually aims to win the first start winning opening 36 by hitting left, but the second starting winning opening 37 than the first starting winning opening 36 When the player who wins the game is advantageous to the player (when the probability of a small hit is high), the player may aim for the second start winning opening 37 by hitting the right. In this case, the special view 2 variation display game may be executed by the winning of the second start winning opening 37, and an error notification is given to stop the player from hitting the right. In the normal gaming state, when a left strike is performed, processing is performed according to a normal route as shown by a dotted line in FIG. 23, and the special view 2 abnormal variation occurrence command (that is, error notification) is not generated. FIG. 2 does not start the abnormal fluctuation notification timer.

  Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing is further explained with reference to time charts of Drawing 24A-Drawing 24C. FIGS. 24A-24C illustrate the results of the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process described above.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, in the normal gaming state (in which the hitting probability is low), the special figure 2 variation display game is executed a plurality of times, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches a prescribed value (here, 5) (A2410 The result is “N”), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer initial value (60 seconds) and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation generation command can be set (A 2412, A 2414), the special figure 2 effect fluctuation receiving command is received The control device 300 can start notification of an error on the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

  After that, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is decremented by 1 from the specified value (5 in this case) (A2411), so unless the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set again, from the next special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process Special figure 2 Anomalous change informing timer can be continuously updated by 1 and clocked (result of A2410 is "Y"). The effect control device 300 can continue error notification until the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is timed up and the special view 2 abnormal change cancellation command is received when the period (60 seconds) corresponding to the initial value elapses. The payout balls are also paid out during the error notification.

  During the error notification period (60 seconds), external information output to the external information terminal 71 is performed, and an external device such as a hall computer can be notified that an error has occurred. Machine error status signal can be output (external information editing process described later).

  In addition, during the timing of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer (during error notification), when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches the specified value (here 5) again, the initial value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is again It is set, and an error notification can be started for 60 seconds from there (timer reset). Also, when a big hit occurs (start), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is transmitted, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer, the special figure 1 fluctuation number are cleared to 0 (special figure display described later Medium processing, fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing).

  Further, in FIG. 23, although the fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure fluctuation display game starts in the low probability state, the fluctuation check flag has a winning in the start winning opening in the low probability state Control may be performed as being set in the case. In this case, as shown in FIG. 24B, the control is performed using the winning number instead of the variable number, and there are multiple wins (special figure 2 wins) on the second start winning opening 37 in the normal gaming state. When the number of abnormal winnings reaches a prescribed value (here, 5), error notification can be started.

  Moreover, in the control of FIG. 23, as shown in FIG. 24A, after the error notification by the special view 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is ended, the special view 2 abnormal variation count is set to 0 (A 2421), but as shown in FIG. The abnormal fluctuation number (abnormal winning number) may be maintained at a prescribed value.

 In FIG. 24C, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches a specified value (here, 18) (the result of A2404 is “N”), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by −1 and reduced, for example, from 4 to 3. (A2405), the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0, the situation where it changes from 18 to 0 is shown (A2406). In this manner, in the normal gaming state (in which the hitting probability is low), even if the special view 2 variation display game is executed a plurality of times by right-handling and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number rises, When returning (stopping the right) and the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number decreases and it is possible to escape from error notification.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is executed at steps A2010, A2012 and A2015 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2501). The status scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming status. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether the signal to be checked is on (A2502). If the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2502 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, prepare a state off flag as a state flag (A2503) and acquire the state off command of the object And prepare (A 2504). Further, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2505). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error-based signal, and indicates a no touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2502 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2506), acquires the state on command of the object, and prepares. (A2507). Furthermore, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2508). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state with respect to an error-based signal, and indicates a touch-on state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  When the process of step A2505 or step A2508 ends, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2509). If they do not match (the result of A2509 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2510), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2511).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A 2512). Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A 2513). If the value of the updated state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A 2513 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A 2513 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1 and the timer comparison value − Stay at the value of 1 (A 2514). Furthermore, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A 2515). If they match (the result of A 2515 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A 2515 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2516). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2517), and the gaming machine state check process is ended. The rendering command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error system command, the effect control device 300 is made to start an error notification.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout busy signal check process. The payout busy signal check processing is executed at step A2016 in the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control apparatus 200 is on (A2601). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is not on (result of A2601 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2602), and sets an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). (A2603). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (result of A2601 is "Y"), a busy status flag is prepared as a determination status (A2604), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2605) ).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state (on / off) of the current payout busy signal (A2606). If they match (the result of A2606 is “Y”), the process moves to a process of step A2609. If they do not match (the result of A2606 is "N"), the state of the current payout busy signal is saved in the busy signal state area (A2607), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2608).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 (A2609), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (A2610). If the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2610 is "N"), the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  If the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (result of A2610 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value smaller than the timer comparison value by 1 (A2611) The prepared status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2612), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  The payout busy signal check process sets a payout busy signal flag (busy signal status) based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not immediately changed, and the busy signal flag is changed when the state which has changed over the timer comparison value continues. It is hard to be influenced by

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an undefined state until one of the signal states continues over the timer comparison value. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A1309) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning on the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A 2701), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring hard random numbers. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there has been a starting opening winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703). Then, when there is no starting opening winning combination (result of A2703 is “N”), it moves to the processing of step A2709.

  When there is a starting opening winning on the first starting winning opening 36 (the result of A 2703 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the hit occurrence probability is a low probability state (A 2704) . Then, if it is in the low probability state (including during the normal gaming state) (result of A2704 is "Y"), it proceeds to the processing of step A2707.

  If the hit occurrence probability is not in the low probability state (in the high probability state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a right-handed command notification command as a rendering command (A2705), The command setting process is executed (A2706). Thereby, the effect control device 300 may display a right-handed instruction display instructing a right-handed operation on the display device 41 as a warning, when there is a start-up winning for the first start winning opening 36 in the high probability state. it can.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by winning to the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes special view starting opening 1 switch processing (A2708). ).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a starting opening 2 winning monitoring table for monitoring the winning on the second starting winning opening (starting opening 2) 37 (A2709), and executes hard random number acquisition processing for acquiring hard random numbers. (A 2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting opening winning to the second starting winning opening 37 (A2711). If there is no starting opening winning combination (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

  When there is a starting opening winning on the second starting winning opening 37 (the result of A2711 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the probability of hitting is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state). It is determined (A2712). If the state is not the high probability state (if the state is the low probability state) (the result of A2712 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the big hit state is in progress (A2713). If the jackpot state is not in progress (the result of A2713 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (A2714). Whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high probability final fluctuation flag set in the high probability fluctuation number updating process described later.

  Here, the high probability final variation (the high probability final variation) is the final special figure variation display game when the special figure variation display game starts in the high probability state, for example, ST (special time) In the game, it is a final special figure fluctuation display game in the case where the high probability state is maintained for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of fluctuation start after the big hit end.

  When the game control apparatus 100 is not in the high probability final change (the result of A2714 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a left hitting instruction informing command as an effect command (A2715), and executes an effect command setting process (A2716). Thus, the effect control device 300 causes the display device 41 to display, as a warning, a left strike instruction display instructing a left strike when there is a start opening winning to the second start winning opening 37 during the normal gaming state. Can.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by winning in the second start winning opening 37 (starting opening 2) (A2717), and executes special view starting opening 2 switch processing (A2718) ), End the start port switch monitoring process. If the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A2712 is "Y"), if it is in the big hit state (the result of A2713 is "Y"), if it is in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A2714) Is “Y”), the process of steps A2717 and A2718 is executed without preparing a left hitting instruction notifying command.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (A2702, A2710) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets start-up-no-commitment absence information indicating that there is no start-up opening winning (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input on the target switch (A2802), and when there is no input on the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

  If there is an input to the target switch (result of A2802 is "Y"), the gaming control apparatus 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register), and whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register It is determined (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.

  If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register (A2805), and the start opening The start-up winning combination information indicating that there is a winning is set (A2806). In addition, the prepared big hit random number is used by the special figure starting port 1 switch process and the special figure starting port 2 switch process.

[Special figure starting port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting opening 1 switch processing (A2708) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view starting opening 1 switch process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first loads the starting opening 1 signal output number, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings on the starting opening 1 switch 36a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 (A2901). Further, the value of the number of times of start port 1 signal output that has been loaded is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the number of times of output overflows (A2903).

  If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the start opening 1 signal output number area of RWM (A2904). On the other hand, if the number of times of output overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the processing of step A2905 is executed without executing the processing of step A2904.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of to-be-updated special views (starting storage) corresponding to the starting opening 1 switch 36a is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (A2905). When the number of to-be- reserved special drawings is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special-figure starting opening 1 switch processing is ended.

  If the special drawing reserve number is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A2906), and updates the special figure 1 reserve number by +1. (A2907). In addition, the special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting of fluctuation information (including distribution of a look-ahead fluctuation pattern).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number (A2908), and saves the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (A2909) ). Subsequently, a jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2910), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911). Furthermore, the small hitting symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2912). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of RWM ( A2913).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure reservation information determination process (prefetching process, prior determination process) for determining the special figure reserve information (A2914), and the special figure 1 reserve number indicating the special figure 1 reserve number A command is prepared as a rendering command (A2915), rendering command setting processing is executed (A2916), and the special view starting opening 1 switch processing is finished. In addition, the details of the special view hold information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special figure starting mouth 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting opening 2 switch processing (A2718) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view starting opening 2 switch process.

The number of times of starting opening 2 signal output which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the starting opening 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 is loaded (A3001). further,
The value of the loaded start opening 2 signal output frequency is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether the output frequency overflows (A3003).

  If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the start opening 2 signal output number area of RWM (A3004). On the other hand, if the number of times of output overflows (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning of the second start winning opening 37 is ineffective, that is, the detection of the start opening 2 switch 37a is ineffective (A3005). In addition, during the stop of the big hit fluctuation / small hit fluctuation (during processing during special map display described later), during the big hit state (from the stop of the big hit fluctuation to the big hit end processing described later), during the small hit state When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is under execution (during fluctuation) until the small hit end processing which will be described later, even if there is a game ball entering the second start winning opening 37, the second start It is treated that there is no winning on the winning opening 37 and is invalidated. When the winning of the second start winning opening 37 is ineffective (the result of A3005 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 ends the special view starting opening 2 switch process.

  On the other hand, when the winning of the second start winning opening 37 is not invalidated (the result of A3005 is "N"), the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the number of special drawing 2 reservations to 1 (A3006). Although the special figure 2 variable display game is started as soon as the special figure 2 start storage occurs, the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to 1 for control. Next, the game control apparatus 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for the special view 2 start storage (A3007), and saves the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (A3008) .

  Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (A3009), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3010). Furthermore, the small hitting symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3011). Next, save the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of RWM (A3012), and start special figure window 2 End the switch processing.

  Note that, as described above, the special view 2 variation display game starts as soon as the special view 2 start memory is generated, so the special view start opening 2 switch process differs from the special view start opening 1 switch process. , The special figure reservation information determination process (pre-reading process, prior determination process) is not performed, and the decorative special figure 2 reserve number command is not prepared either.

  As described above, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of gaming balls into the start winning area of the first start winning opening 36 and the second start winning opening 37, and the variation display game is performed. A start winning memory storing means is provided which stores a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory to be an execution right. In addition, the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) stores the first start memory (up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit of various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning hole 36). The various random number values stored based on the special figure 1 start memory, the special figure 1 start winning memory) and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning hole 37 are limited to a predetermined number (1 here) as the upper limit 2) Store as start-up memory (special-image 2 start-up memory, special-image 2 start-up winning memory)

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view reserve information determination process (A2914) in the special view start port 1 switch process described above will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special map hold information determination process (pre-reading process, prior determination process). The special view reservation information determination process is executed only for the first start storage (the special view 1 start storage) generated based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first start winning opening 36.

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (ie, a probability change state) (A3101). If the state is not the high probability state (the result of A3101 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the big hit state is in progress (A3102). When the jackpot state is not in progress (the result of A3102 is "N"), the jackpot determination processing is executed based on the jackpot random number value stored as the first start storage (A3103).

  In the high probability state (the result of A3101 is "Y") or when it is in the big hit state (the result of A3102 is "Y"), the special view reservation information determination process does not perform the big hit determination process etc. It ends as it is (pre-judgment (pre-reading) is not performed).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (A3104). If the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3104 is "Y"), set a big hit symbol random number check table (A3105) and acquire big hit stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number (A3106), step A3111 Transfer to processing of

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (in the case of out of place) (if the result of A3104 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 performs the small hit determination process based on the big hit random number value stored as the first start memory. The process is executed (A3107), and it is determined whether the determination result is a small hit (A3108). In the present embodiment, a big hit random number is also used to determine a small hit.

  If the determination result of the small hitting determination processing of the small hitting determination process is a small hitting (result of A3108 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets the stop symbol information of the small hitting (A3109), and the determination result is not a small hitting (A3108) The result is “N”), and the stop symbol information of the detachment is set (A3110).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares as a rendering command a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the acquired or set stop symbol information (A3111), and executes a rendering command setting process (A3112). And special figure 1 information setting processing (A3113) which sets the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 1 which sets the fluctuation feature of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game The fluctuation pattern setting process (A3114) is executed. Subsequently, a preread variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number and the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A3115), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3116).

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view 1 game process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A 3201). When it is not in the big hit state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game (the result of A3201 is N), big winning a prize mouth switch supervisory processing is executed (A3202). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball at the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39 Monitor detection.

  Next, if the special processing 1 game processing timer is not 0, game control control 100 100 renews 1 (subtracts 1) (A3203). The special processing 1 game processing timer is clocked only by the interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interruption processing by -1 updating. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. If the special figure 2 variable display game is in a big hit state or a small hit state (result of A3201 is “Y”), the process of step A3203 is performed without performing the process of step A3202. Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3204). If the special processing 1 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3204 is N), it moves to the processing of step A3219.

  When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3204 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the special game 1 game processing number A special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding processing is set in a register (A3205). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special view 1 game process number is acquired using the special view 1 game sequence branch table (A3206). Subsequently, a subroutine call according to the special view 1 game process number is made, and a game branching process corresponding to the special view 1 game process number is executed (A3207).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of the change of the special view 1 change display game, and sets the start of the change of the special view 1 change display game and sets the effect. In addition, special figure 1 usual processing is executed which performs setting etc of information necessary for performing special figure 1 fluctuation processing (A3208). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "1" at step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. The special figure 1 during fluctuation process is executed (A3209). The details of the special figure 1 during variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number of the special view 1 variation display game is a big hit when the game processing number is “2” at step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, and each The special figure 1 display process is executed to set the fan fare time according to the big hit opening pattern of the big hit, to set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process (A3210). The details of the special view 1 display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "3" at step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and the information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process. The fanfare / interval processing for setting etc. is executed (A3211). The details of the fanfare / in-interval process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is "4" at step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if the big round is the final round, A special winning opening open processing is performed to set information required to perform the special winning opening residual ball processing (A3212). The details of the special winning opening open process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is "5" at step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets a time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round, A big winning opening remaining ball process is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process (A3213). The details of the special winning opening residual ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "6" at step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or information necessary to execute the special figure 1 routine processing. The special figure 1 big hit end processing which does setting and the like is executed (A3214). The details of the special figure 1 big hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "7" at step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets the information necessary for performing the small hit, etc. Perform small hit fanfare medium processing (A3215). The details of the small hit fanfare medium process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "8" at step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 performs a process of setting a small hitting end command, a setting of information necessary for performing a small hitting residual ball process, etc. Execute processing during hit (A3216). The details of the small hit middle process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "9" in step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets the time for the remaining balls in the special winning opening to be discharged, and the special figure 1 small hit end process. A small hit residual sphere process is performed to set information necessary for the execution (A3217). The details of the small hit residual ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "10" at step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or information necessary to execute the special figure 1 routine processing. The special figure 1 small hit termination process which performs setting etc. is executed (A3218). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 small hitting end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing based on the special view 1 game processing number is completed, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a special view 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special view 1 display 51 (A 3219), and then displays the special view 1 The symbol variation control process related to the container 51 is executed (A3220), and the special view 1 game process is ended.

[Special figure 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 2 game process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A 3301). When it is not in the big hit state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game (the result of A3301 is N), big winning a prize opening switch supervisory processing is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball at the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39 Monitor detection.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates −1 (if one is subtracted) if the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3303). The special processing 2 game processing timer is clocked only by the interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interruption processing by -1 updating. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. If the special figure 2 variation display game is in a big hit state or a small hit state (result of A3301 is "Y"), the processing of step A3303 is performed without performing the processing of step A3302. Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3304). If the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3304 is “N”), it moves to the processing of step A3322.

  When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 of the special figure 2 game processing timer It is determined whether the number of repetitions is 0 (A3305). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3306), and the special figure 2 game processing timer A long fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3307). As described later, when the special view 2 fluctuation display game is a long fluctuation and the fluctuation time is a long time (for example, 10 minutes), the timer of the fluctuation time can not be set with 2 bytes, so step A3303-A3307 By repeating the process of counting the long fluctuation timer value by the number of repetitions, the long fluctuation time timer for the special view 2 fluctuation display game is prepared.

  In the case where the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is “Y”) and the repetition count of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”) The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3308). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3309). Subsequently, a subroutine call according to the special figure 2 game process number is made, and a game branching process according to the special figure 2 game process number is executed (A3310).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the special view 2 change display game, and sets the start of change of the special view 2 change display game and sets the effect. The special figure 2 routine process is executed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 2 variation process (A3311). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "1" at step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. The special figure 2 during fluctuation process is executed (A3312). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 during variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number of the special view 2 variation display game is a big hit when the game processing number is “2” at step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, and each The special figure 2 display process is executed to set the fan fare time according to the big hit opening pattern of the big hit, to set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like (A3313). The details of the special view 2 display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "3" at step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and the information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process. The fanfare / interval processing for setting etc. is executed (A3314). The fanfare / during-interval process is common to that executed in the special view 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “4” in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if the big round is the final round, A special winning opening open processing is performed to set information required to perform the special winning opening residual ball processing (A3315). The special winning opening open process is the same as that executed in the special view 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is "5" at step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 sets the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round, A special winning opening residual ball process is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process (A3316). The special winning opening remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special view 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "6" in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 executes the special figure 2 big hit end process which performs setting of information necessary for executing the special figure 2 routine process ((3) A3317). The details of the special figure 2 big hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "7" in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets the information necessary for performing the small hit, etc. Perform a small hit fanfare medium process (A3318). The small hit fanfare middle process is common to that executed in the special view 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "8" at step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 performs a process of setting a small hitting end command, a setting of information necessary for performing a small hitting residual ball process, etc. The middle hit process is executed (A3319). The small hit middle process is the same as that executed in the special view 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "9" in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 sets the time for the remaining balls in the special winning opening to be discharged, and the special figure 2 small hit end process. A small hit residual sphere process is performed to set information necessary for the execution (A3320). The small hit residual ball processing is common to that executed in the special view 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "10" at step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 executes the special figure 2 small hitting end process which performs setting of information necessary for executing the special figure 2 routine process, etc. (A3321). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing based on the special view 2 game processing number is finished, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a special view 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special view 2 display 52 (A3322), and then displays the special view 2 The symbol variation control process related to the container 52 is executed (A3323), and the special view 2 game process is ended.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A3202, A3302) in the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the upper large winning opening (the second special variation winning device 39) is open (A3401), and the upper large winning opening is not open (the result of A3401 is "N"), it is determined whether or not remaining ball processing of upper large winning a prize opening is underway (A3402). If the remaining balls are not being processed for the upper large winning opening (the result of A3402 is "N"), it is determined whether the lower large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) is open (A3403). In the case of the big hit state or the small hit state, the upper large winning opening and / or the lower large winning opening may be open.

  When the lower large winning opening is open (the result of A3403 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the lower large winning opening switch has an input (A3404), and the lower large winning opening switch If there is an input (the result of A3404 is "Y"), a winning counter for counting the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening added in the current special winning opening switch monitoring process is set to 1 (A3405). If the lower prize winning opening is not open (result of A3403 is "N") or there is no input on the lower winning prize opening switch (result of A3404 is "N"), the special winning mouth switch monitoring process is ended Do.

  On the other hand, when the game control apparatus 100 is opening the upper prize winning opening (the result of A3401 is "Y") or when remaining ball processing of the upper winning prize opening is in progress (the result of A3402 is "Y" ) And the winning counter is set to 0 (A3406). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is an input to upper large winning opening switch 1 among upper large winning opening switch 39a (A3407), and when there is no input to upper large winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3407 is "N" And the process of step A3411.

  When there is an input on the upper prize winning opening switch 1 (result of A3407 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a big winning opening count command as an effect command to produce an effect by winning (A3408), The effect command setting process is executed (A3409), and the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3410).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input on the upper prize winning opening switch 2 (A3411). When there is no input to the upper large winning a prize mouth switch 2 (result of A3411 is "N"), it moves to the processing of step A3415. When there is an input on the upper large winning opening switch 2 (result of A3411 is "Y"), in order to perform effects by winning, prepare a large winning opening count command as an effect command (A3412), execute the effect command setting processing (A3413), the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3414).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning counter is 0 (A3415). If the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3415 is "N"), the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress It is determined whether or not (A3416). If the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3416 is "N"), it is determined whether small hit residual ball processing is in progress (A3417). If the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3417 is "N"), the value of the winning counter (here, 1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count number (A3418).

  On the other hand, when the winning a prize counter is 0 (the result of A3415 is “Y”), when the game control device 100 is in the process of big winning opening remaining ball processing (the result of A3416 is “Y”), or the small hit remaining When the ball processing is in progress (the result of A3417 is "Y"), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit (for example, 9 in the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (A3419), and the special winning opening count number. Is less than the upper limit value (the result of A3419 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (the result of A3419 is "Y"), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (A3420), and the target figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3421). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot is open (A 3422), and if not being hit by the jackpot (result of A 3422 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing finish. If the big hit opening is in progress (the result of A3422 is "Y"), the value of the big hit opening operation end is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (A3423), and then the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 routine process (A3208) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 1 normal processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the special view 1 change display game can start changing (A 3501). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can not start fluctuation (when the fluctuation start is impossible) (result of A3501 is “N”), special figure 1 game processing number “0” in special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM Save (A3502). In addition, here, from the end of the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (during special processing 2 display processing) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 2 big hit end processing), From the end of the hit variation (during special processing being displayed) to the end of the small hit operation (special feature 2 small hit end processing), it is determined that the special view 1 variation display game can not start changing.

  When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can start fluctuation (the result of A 3501 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the left hitting instruction has been notified (A 3503). If a left-handed command notification command has already been prepared as a rendering command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that a left-handed command notification has been made. If the left-handed instruction has been notified (the result of A3503 is “Y”), the process moves to a process of step A3507.

  The game control apparatus 100 prepares a left hitting instruction notifying command as a rendering command (A3504) and executes a rendering command setting process (A3505) if the left hitting instruction is not notified (the result of A3503 is "N"). A left-handed command notification flag indicating that a left-handed command notification (display) is to be performed by the device 41 or the like is set (A3506).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the number of special image 1 reservations is 0 (A3507). When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (the result of A 3507 is “Y”), the special figure 1 routine process number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area of RWM (A 3502). Thereby, the special figure 1 usual processing is repeated until the special figure 1 reservation number becomes 1 or more.

  When special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3507 is “N”), game control control equipment 100 makes fluctuation start probability information command which corresponds to present probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as production command Preparation (A3508), and executes rendering command setting processing (A3509). Subsequently, special figure 1 variation start processing for starting a special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3510). After that, a decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number is prepared as an effect command (A3511), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3512).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets information on the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A 3513). Here, in the special drawing status area, information of special drawing 1 fluctuation or (special drawing 1 fluctuation + special drawing 2 fluctuation) is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (A 3514), and if it is not a high probability state (if it is a low probability state) (the result of A 3514 is "N") It is determined whether or not (A3515). Whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high probability final fluctuation flag described later.

  When the game control apparatus 100 is not in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3515 is "N"), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A3516) and the special figure 1 fluctuation processing setting processing is executed (A3517) ). The special view 1 fluctuation check flag is used in the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 23) described above.

  On the other hand, when the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A3514 is "Y"), or when the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (the result of A3515 is "Y"), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag The special process 1 during process transition setting process is executed (A3517) without setting.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 routine process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view 2 normal processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special view 2 change display game can start changing (A3601). When special figure 2 fluctuation display game can not start fluctuation (when fluctuation start is impossible) (Result of A3601 is “N”), special figure 2 game processing number “0” in special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM Save (A3602). Here, from the end of the big hit fluctuation of special figure 1 fluctuation display game (during special processing 1 display processing) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 1 big hit end processing), and the small figure of special drawing 1 fluctuation display game From the end of the hit variation (during special processing 1 display processing) to the end of the small hit operation (special figure 1 small hit end processing), it is determined that the special view 2 variable display game can not start changing.

  When the special figure 2 variation display game can start variation (the result of A3601 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 or not (A3602). Special figure 2 If the number of reservations is not 0 (result of A3602 is “N”), prepare fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as effect command (A3603), The effect command setting process is executed (A3604). Subsequently, special figure 2 variation start processing for starting a special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3605).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets information on the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3606). Here, in the special view status area, information of special view 2 fluctuation or (special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in the high probability state (A3607), and if it is not in the high probability state (if it is in the low probability state) (the result of A3607 is "N") It is determined whether or not (A3608). Whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high probability final fluctuation flag described later.

  When the game control apparatus 100 is not in the high probability final change (the result of A3608 is "N"), the special figure 2 change check flag is set (A3609), and the special figure 2 in process change setting processing is executed (A3610) ). The special view 2 fluctuation check flag is used in the special view 2 abnormal change monitoring process (FIG. 23) described above.

  On the other hand, when the gaming control apparatus 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A3614 is "Y") or when the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (the result of A3615 is "Y"), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag Is not set, the special processing during variation processing shift setting processing is executed (A3617).

If the game control device 100 is the special figure 2 reserve number is 0 (result of A3602 is “Y”),
It is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 or not (A3611). If the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (the result of A 3611 is “Y”), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in motion (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (A 3612). If the special figure 1 is not moving (the result of A3612 is "N"), it is judged whether or not the customer waiting demo is started (A3613). If the waiting for customer demonstration has not been started (the result of A3613 is "N"), the waiting for customer demonstration flag is set (A3614).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as a rendering command (A3615), and executes rendering command setting processing (A3616). The presentation control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41. Thereafter, the special figure 2 routine process number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM (A3617). Thereby, the special figure 2 usual processing is repeated until the special figure 2 reservation number becomes one.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3611 is "N"), the special figure 1 variable display game is to be executed. Special process 2 usually process number "0" is saved in the game process number area (A3617). Also, when special figure 1 is in motion (result of A3612 is "Y") or when waiting for customer demonstration is started (result of A3613 is "Y"), prepare customer waiting demo command etc. Instead, the special figure 2 routine process number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM (A3617).

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 1 fluctuation start process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the special view 1 information setting flag (A3701). In addition, the special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting of fluctuation information (including distribution of a look-ahead fluctuation pattern). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 setting process (A 3702) for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit or not, the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information Execute special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A 3703) related to setting), and special figure 1 information setting process (A 3704) to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting fluctuation pattern of special figure 1 fluctuation display game Do.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3705 ). Subsequently, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game ( Execute A3707).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (ie, a probability change state) (A3708). If the state is not the high probability state (the result of A3708 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (A3709). If the high probability final change is not in progress (the result of A3709 is “N”), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is in change (special figure 2 change display game is being executed) (A3710).

  When the special figure 2 is moving (the result of A3710 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3711). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A 3711 is “Y”), that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is within the time value range of the special figure 2 game processing timer If yes, the process proceeds to step A3714.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3711 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more as a predetermined number. (A3712). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is less than a predetermined number (here, the result of A3712 is "N"), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is calculated (A3713). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is calculated by the value of (special figure 2 game processing timer area value + repetition count × 60000 msec).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the fluctuation time of the special view 1 fluctuation display game to be started is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special view 2 fluctuation display game (A3714). If the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is equal to or more than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (result of A3714 is "N"), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is A command to notify that it is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3715), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3716). If the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is equal to or more than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display on the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a small hit etc. The effects associated with the game may end abruptly. For this reason, the effect control device 300 that has received the above command sets (changes) the effect related to the decorative special figure 1 variable display game to, for example, a non-flashy one so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a high probability change count update process for updating and managing the change count (remaining count) of the special view change display game started in the high probability state (A3717), and special figure 1 change start processing Finish.

  On the other hand, in the high probability state (the result of A3708 is "Y"), when the high probability final change is in progress (the result of A3709 is "Y"), when the special figure 2 is not in change (the result of A3710 is " In N ′ ′), the processing of steps A3711 to A3716 is not performed, and the processing proceeds to step A3717.

  In addition, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is a predetermined number or more (here, 4) or more (the result of A3712 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 changes the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (This is 240 (= 4 × 60) seconds or more here) is longer than the longest variation time of the special view 1 variation display game, so a command to notify that the variation time of the special view 1 variation display game is longer To step A3717 without preparing for.

  Furthermore, when the variation time of the special view 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special view 2 variation display game (the result of A3714 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 also performs the special view 1 variation display game. The process shifts to the processing of step A3717 without preparing a command notifying that the fluctuation time of is longer.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the special view 2 change start process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the special view 2 information setting flag (A3801). In addition, the special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting of fluctuation information (including distribution of a look-ahead fluctuation pattern). Subsequently, the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3802) to set the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit or not, the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information Execute special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803), special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting fluctuation pattern of special figure 2 fluctuation display game according to setting). Do.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3805 ). Subsequently, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting information of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ( A3807) A high probability change number update process of updating and managing the change number (remaining number) of the special figure change display game started in the high probability state is executed (A3808), and the special figure 1 change start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A 3702) in the special view 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first saves shift information in the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3901a), and saves shift information in the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A 3902a). Subsequently, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (A3903a). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904a).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3905a). If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3905a is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random number value, perform a big hit determination processing to determine whether the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A3906a ), It is determined whether the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907a). If the result of the judgment is a big hit (the result of A3907a is "Y"), the big hit information is saved by overwriting the big hit flag 1 area which saved the outlier information in step A3902a (A3908a), and the big hit flag 1 setting processing finish. Since the big hit flag 1 can be a big hit (big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area) only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (big hit flag 1 and big hit flag 2 can be avoided to be a big hit at the same time) .

  If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (result of A3905a is "Y"), or the determination result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (result of A3907a is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 acquires A small hit determination process is performed to determine whether the special view 1 variation display game is a small hit based on the big hit random number value (A3909a), and it is determined whether the result of the determination is a small hit (A3909a) A3910a). In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A3910a is “Y”), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3901a (A3911a), The big hit flag 1 setting processing ends. If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910a is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting processing is ended without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A 3802) in the special view 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

  The big hit flag 2 setting process sets the "small hit flag 1" in the big hit flag 1 setting process (Fig. 39A) to the "small hit flag 2", the "big hit flag 1" to the "big hit flag 2", and the "big hit flag 2" Since “big hit flag 1” is replaced by “big hit flag 1” and “special figure 1” is replaced by “special figure 2”, the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed, so detailed description will be omitted. Note that steps A3901b to A3911b in the big hit flag 2 setting process correspond to steps A3901 a to A3911 a in the big hit flag 1 setting process, respectively.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process (A3906a, A3906b) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3103 of the special view suspension information determination process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value (A4001), and judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (A4002). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A4002 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets out (other than the jackpot) as the judgment result (A4007) and ends the jackpot judgment processing Do.

  Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A4002 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (A4003) . Then, in the case of the high probability state (the result of A4003 is “Y”), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (A4004). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (the result of A4003 is "N"), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (A4005).

  After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A4006). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is "N"), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909a, A3909b) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the small hitting determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3107 of the special view suspension information determination process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (A4101). Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit.

  Naturally, the range of small hit judgment values (between the small hit lower judgment value and the small hit upper judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not uniquely provided, and the big hit random number is used for the small hit determination, but a unique small hit random number may be provided.

  If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (result of A4101 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets a gap as the judgment result (A4106), and ends the small hit judgment processing. .

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the low hit lower limit judgment value (result of A4101 is “N”), game control control 100 decides whether information setting regarding special figure 1 fluctuation indicator game is under setting (A4102). Then, when information is being set regarding the special view 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A4102 is “Y”), the small hitting upper limit judgment value for the special view 1 fluctuation display game is set (A4103). On the other hand, when information is not set regarding the special view 1 change display game (result of A4102 is “N”), the small hitting upper limit judgment value for the special view 2 change display game is set (A4104).

  After setting the small hitting upper limit judgment value, the gaming control apparatus 100 judges whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hitting upper limit judgment value (A4105). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4105 is “Y”), the deviation is set as the judgment result (A4106). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4105 is "N"), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A4107). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is ended.

  FIG. 42 shows the big hit probability (the probability that the judgment result will be a big hit), the small hit probability (the probability that the judgment result will be a small hit), the out probability (the judgment result will be a loss) by the above-mentioned big hit judgment processing and small hit judgment processing Probability) is shown for the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game. FIG. 42 (a) shows the probability in the low probability state, and FIG. 42 (b) shows the probability in the high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit probability (probability of big hit) is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state. The small hit probability (small hit probability) is the same for the high probability state and the low probability state. The out probability (the occurrence probability of out) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It becomes higher than in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it becomes lower than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (in the high probability state, the special game 2 fluctuation display game has a break probability of 0). Therefore, the above special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing is performed because the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 is more advantageous to the player than the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (especially, regarding the small hitting probability). Is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, FIG. 6A, and FIG. 6B, the big hit symbol is only a definite symbol, and after the big hit status (special game status) ends, it becomes a high probability status (ceremony status) without exception. The rate is 100%. Also, the high probability state continues until the variable display game starts a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the end of the big hit.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A4301a). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4301a is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 hit symbol symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A4302a). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4303a), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4304a). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305a), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306a). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of RWM (A4307a), and the big winning corresponding to the stop symbol number The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 large winning opening mouth opening information area of the RWM (A4308a). Thereafter, the process of step A4316a is performed. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4301a is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit, ie, the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area. It is judged whether it is saved (A4309a). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A4309a is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4310a). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4311a), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol save area (A4312a). This process selects the type of the specific result. Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A 4313 a). Thereafter, the process of step A4316a is performed.

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (result of A4309a is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (A4314a) and the disconnection stop symbol pattern Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4315a). Thereafter, the process of step A4316a is performed.

  After steps A4308a, A4313a, and A4315a, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a decoration special view 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4316a). In addition, the stop symbol pattern is the off symbol in FIG. 5, a plurality of big hit symbols (4R positive variation A2, 8R positive variation A3, 16R positive variation A1, 16R positive variation B1-B3), and a small hit symbol (special figure 1 small hit) It corresponds to either. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is set.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the decoration special figure 1 command as a decoration command in the decoration special figure 1 command area (A4317a), and executes a production command setting process (A4318a). The decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319a), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 number of reservations) to 0 (A4320a Special character 1 small hit design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 clear (A4321a). Thereafter, the special view 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A 3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing.

  Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, "small hit flag 1" in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (Figure 43A) to "small hit flag 2", "big hit flag 1" to "big hit flag 2", " Special figure 1 "is replaced with" special figure 2 ", and since the same processing as special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing is performed, detailed explanation is omitted. In addition, step A4301b-A4321b in special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing respectively corresponds to step A4301a-A4321a in special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing.

  In addition, the stop symbol pattern set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the off symbols in FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, a plurality of big hit symbols (2R positive variation D1, 4R positive variation D3, 8R positive variation E2, 16R positive variation E1, F2, It corresponds to any of F3) and a plurality of small hit symbols (special figure 2 small hit 1-3). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view 2 variation display game is set.

  As described above, the game control device 100 executes the special view 1 variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the gaming ball at the first start winning opening 36, and The special display 2 variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the detection to constitute a variable display game execution means. In addition, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the special view 1 information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the game is in a high probability state (A4401). If it is not the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state) (the result of A4401 is “N”), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (A4402). Then, the former half offset data and the latter half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4403).

  Here, the first half offset data (variation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation. The first half fluctuation is the fluctuation mode before the start of the reach, and the second half fluctuation is the fluctuation mode after reaching the reach state, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc. including no reach).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the result of the special view 1 change display game is a big hit (A4404), and the result of the special view 1 change display game is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is "N") ), It is determined whether the result of the special view 1 variation display game is a small hit (A4405).

  When the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A4405 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs special view on the latter half offset data in order to distribute the latter half fluctuation according to the number of special view 1 reservations. 1 Hold number is added to update the value (A4406), and in order to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special view 1 hold number, the special figure 1 hold number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (A4407). When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a small hit (in the case of out of place) (the result of A4405 is “N”), the processing of step A4406 is not performed and the number of special figure 1 reservations is added only to the first half offset data. Convert the value (A4407).

  If the result of the special view 1 variation display game is a big hit (result of A4404 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 does not perform the processing of step A4405-A4407, and the first half offset data and second half offset acquired in step A4403 The process moves to the processing of step A 4412 without updating or converting data.

  On the other hand, when the gaming control apparatus 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A4401 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (A4408). If the result of the special view 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4408 is "N"), set the first half offset data for outliers and small hits of the special view 1 with high probability (A4409), processing of step A4411 Migrate to If the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (the result of A4408 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of the special view 1 at the high probability is set (A4410). Subsequently, the second half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is set (A4411). Thus, in the high probability state, the special view 1 fluctuation display game changes for a long time.

  After step A4404, A4407, or A4411, the game control apparatus 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the RWM variable distribution information 1 area (A4412), and the second half offset data (variable distribution) The information 2) is saved in the RWM variation distribution information 2 area (A4413), and the special figure 1 information setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 information setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the special view 2 information setting process.

  First, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the high probability state (A4501). In the case of the high probability state (the result of A4501 is "N"), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (A4502). Then, the former half offset data and the latter half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4503). The first half offset data (variation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation.

  On the other hand, when the gaming control apparatus 100 is not in the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state) (the result of A4501 is "N"), it determines whether the result of the special view 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit (A4504) . If the result of the special view 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4504 is "N"), set the first half offset data for outliers and small hits of the special view 2 at low probability (A4505), processing of step A4507 Migrate to If the result of the special view 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4504 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the big hit of the special view 2 at the low probability is set (A4506). Subsequently, the second half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special view 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4507). As a result, in the low probability state, the special view 2 fluctuation display game changes for a long time (long fluctuation).

  After step A4503 or A4507, the game control apparatus 100 saves the first half offset data (the fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4508), and the second half offset data (the fluctuation distribution information 2) The data is saved in the RWM variation distribution information 2 area (A4509), and the special figure 2 information setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a change group address table (A4601), acquires and prepares an address of a second half change group table corresponding to the change distribution information 2 (A4602), and changes the change pattern random number of Special Figure 1 1 Load and prepare the fluctuation pattern random number 1 as a random number from one storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4603).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special view 1 variation display game is a release (A4604). When the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out (the result of A4604 is “Y”), 2 bytes distribution processing based on fluctuation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605), the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is lost If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604 is “N”), distribution processing based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606).

  Note that the structure of the second half fluctuation group table is different from that in the regular use and for the secondary use, and in the regular use, the distribution random number has a 1-byte size, and the random number has a 2-byte size. Although the size of the common game is 1 byte to save the data capacity, 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate per game of the special view 1 variable display game is low. In the case of a hit (big hit or small hit), only the lower value of the variation pattern random number 1 is used.

  After step A4605 or A4606, the game control apparatus 100 acquires and prepares the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4607). Subsequently, load and prepare the variation pattern random number 2 as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for number of reservations 1) of Special Figure 1 (A4608), and execute distribution processing based on the variation pattern random number 2 (A4609) . Then, the second-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the assignment is acquired and saved in the second-half fluctuation number area (A4610). The second half fluctuation pattern is set by the above process. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614), and distribution processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the first half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half fluctuation number area (A4616), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. By the above process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a second half change selection address table (A4701), and acquires and prepares an address of a second half change selection table corresponding to the change distribution information 2 (A4702). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 (A4703), and the sorting process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4704). The second-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the second-half fluctuation number area (A4705). The second half fluctuation pattern is set by the above process. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4706), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4707). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4708). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area of the special figure 2 (A4709), and distribution processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4710).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the first half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half fluctuation number area (A4711), and ends the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. By the above process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[2-byte distribution process]
Next, details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4605) in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a second half variation selection table of the special view 1 variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether the data at the beginning of the second half of the variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without sorting (ie, "0") (A4801), It is determined whether the code is not assigned (A4802).

  Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but defines the second half fluctuation pattern group in which only the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach". In the fluctuation group table (for example, a part of fluctuation group table when the result is out), since there is no need to distribute, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the head .

  Then, when the first data of the second half fluctuation group table is the code without distribution (the result of A4802 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4807) ), 2 byte distribution processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the first data in the second half fluctuation group table is not a code without distribution (the result of A4802 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 determines one distribution value defined first in the second half fluctuation group table To get (A4803).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in the process of step A4803 from the random number value (value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in the process of step A4603 of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. New random number value is calculated (A4804). Furthermore, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (A4805).

  When the new random number is not smaller than “0” (result of A4805 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4806), and the processing after step A4803 Run. That is, the distribution value defined next in the fluctuation group selection table is acquired (A4803), the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in the process of step A4805 as a new random number value, and further a new random value Calculate (A4804). Then, each process is executed until it is determined that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A 4805 is “Y”) in the process of step A 4805 for the calculated new random value. Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the second half fluctuation group table.

  Then, when the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4805 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4807), and the 2 bytes End the distribution process.

[Distribution process]
Next, details of special processing 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing and distribution processing (A4606, A4609, A4615, A4704, A4710) in the special processing 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of distribution processing. In the sorting process, the second half variation selection table of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1 or the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 A process for selecting a second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, or selecting a first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3 It is.

  In the game control apparatus 100, first, the prepared data for the second half fluctuation group table (selection table), the second half fluctuation selection table (selection table) and the first half fluctuation selection table (selection table) has no distribution code (ie, " 0)) is checked (A4901), and it is determined whether it is a code without distribution (A4902).

  Here, the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern or the first half fluctuation pattern, as in the second half fluctuation group table. In the case of the selection table having no, the distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  Then, when the first data of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table is a code without distribution (the result of A4902 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 The address of the corresponding data is updated (A4907), and the distribution processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the game control apparatus 100 does not assign the first data of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table (No in A4902), the second half fluctuation group table or One distribution value defined at first in the second half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4903).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A 4903 from the loaded random number value (value of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) to calculate a new random number value (A 4904). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (A4905).

  If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4906), and performs the processing after step A4903. Run. That is, the allocation value defined next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table is acquired (A4903), and the random number value determined in step A4905 is used as a new random number value. The subtraction is performed to calculate a new random number (A4904). Then, the process is performed until it is determined that the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "Y"). Thereby, any one of the second-half fluctuation number and the first-half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second-half fluctuation pattern or the first-half fluctuation pattern defined in the second-half fluctuation selection table or the first-half fluctuation selection table.

  Then, when the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4907), and the distribution process is performed. Finish.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether information is being set regarding the special view 1 change display game (A5001). When information is being set regarding the special figure 1 variation display game (result of A5001 is “Y”), the random number storage area (for holding ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 used is cleared (A5002 ). When information is not being set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (result of A5001 is “N”), since information is being set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the random numbers of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 to 3 of the special figure 2 used. Clear the storage area (A5003).

  After steps A5002 and A5003, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5004), and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5005). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A5006), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A5007).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A5008), and saves the addition value in the target figure game processing timer area (A5009). Subsequently, it is determined whether information is being set regarding the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A5010). When information is not being set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (result of A5010 is "N"), since information is being set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the long fluctuation (long time fluctuation) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game It is determined whether or not to start (A5011).

  When the game control apparatus 100 does not start long fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (result of A5011 is “N”), 0 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5012), the special figure 2 Variation Display When long variation of the game is started (result of A5011 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the number-of-repetitions area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5013). Special figure 2 fluctuation display game In the long fluctuation of the 2 byte timer, the fluctuation time (for example 10 minutes) which is not sufficient with 2 byte timer, the specified repetition frequency (here 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the repetition frequency It is set to the area. In the timer interrupt process of interrupt cycle 4 msec (milliseconds), the 2-byte timer can set up to about 262 seconds.

  For example, when the timer of 60000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of repetitions of nine times is saved, timer interrupt processing (especially, special figure 2) The timer is decremented in the game process (FIG. 33) (A3303), and when the time is up (the result of A3304 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3306). The value 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set. As a result, it is possible to set the long fluctuation special game 2 fluctuation display game to a long fluctuation time of 60000 msec + (60000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

  It should be noted that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the case of no long variation (the number of repetitions = 0) are the first half variation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5009. It becomes the addition value of the time value and the second half fluctuation time value.

  When information is being set regarding the special view 1 fluctuation display game (result of A5010 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to step A5014 without setting the number of repetitions of the timer.

  After steps A5010, A5012, and A5013, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5014), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5015). . Then, an effect command setting process for transmitting the change command as an effect command is executed (A5016).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether information is being set regarding the special view 1 variation display game (A5017). When information is being set regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A5017 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation number is updated by 1 (A5018), and the contents of the random number storage area pertaining to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game Shift (A5019) and clear the free space after shift (A5020). When information is not being set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (result of A5017 is "N"), since information is being set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the contents of the random number storage area are not shifted (special figure 1 The number of reservations is 1), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern may be mentioned, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability change number updating process (A3717, A3808) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the high probability variation count update process. In the high probability change number updating process, the number of changes (here, the high probability change number as the remaining number of changes) of the special figure change display game started in the high probability state is updated and managed.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the game is in a high probability state (A5101). If the state is not the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state) (the result of A5101 is “N”), the high probability change number updating process is ended.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, it is in a low probability state (it can be set to a low probability state in fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting processing described later). That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, not only the special figure 1 variation display game but also the special figure 2 variation display game is executed in a low probability state, and the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit. Not only the variable display game shown in FIG. 2 but also the special view 1 variable display game is executed with low probability. In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, there is a possibility of high probability state, and the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are in high probability state It may be executed.

  When the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A5101 is “Y”), the high probability fluctuation number indicating the number of remaining times of the special figure fluctuation display game starting in the high probability state is updated by −1 (1 Only) (A5102). In addition, the initial value of the high probability change frequency is the change frequency at which the high probability state is maintained after the big hit end, and is set to, for example, 50 times (Special figure 1 big hit end processing or special figure 2 big hit end process described later) ). In addition, the high probability fluctuation number is updated by -1 even when either the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game starts changing.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether the high probability fluctuation number is 0 (A5103). If the high probability fluctuation number is not 0 (the result of A5103 is "N"), that is, if the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. If the high probability fluctuation number is 0 (the result of A5103 is “Y”), the signal (off data of the big hit 2 signals) regarding the end of the high probability is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A5104). Further, the signal relating to the high probability & the end of the short time is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5105). For the high probability & time short end signal, for example, off data of special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 2 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation It is the off data of the time saving state signal.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the low probability number in the gaming state display number area of RWM (A5106), and saves the special figure low probability & time saving none flag in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM ( A5107) A high probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to a symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start fluctuation is set (A5108), and the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

  The high probability final variation flag is information for indicating that the variation started in the high probability even if the probability is low. In the high probability final fluctuation (final fluctuation with high probability), if the probability is not dropped immediately after the start of fluctuation, the hit due to the starting opening winning in the final fluctuation is judged with high probability. Therefore, at the start of fluctuation of the high probability final fluctuation, the hit probability is set to the low probability by the special figure low probability & time saving none flag. Therefore, a high probability final change flag is set and used to determine whether it is a high probability final change (for example, in steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A3709, etc.). Further, the high probability final change flag also includes information that can be used to determine whether the high probability final change is a special figure 1 or a special figure 2.

  As described above, after the end of the big hit, the high probability state is maintained until the variable display game is started a predetermined number of times (the initial value of the high probability change number, for example, 50 times). When the eye variation display game (high probability final variation) is started, the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is set, and it becomes a low probability state and the time saving state ends, and a high probability final variation flag Is set.

[Special figure 1 during process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 during fluctuation process transition setting process (A3517) in the special figure 1 ordinary process will be described. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 1 during process transition setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “1” as a process number to shift to the special figure 1 fluctuation process (A5201a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5202a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A 5203 a), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 (special data of the symbol 1 in-motion signal on data) is saved in the test signal output data area (A 5204 a).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a flag under fluctuation in the special view 1 fluctuation control flag area (A5205a). Subsequently, save the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special display 1 display 51) in the special drawing 1 blinking control timer area (A5206a), and the special drawing 1 symbol number area is changing. The initial value of the symbol number (for example, 0 indicating the non-lighting symbol in FIG. 5) is saved (A5207a), and the special processing 1 variation processing transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 during process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 during variation process transition setting process (A3610) in the special figure 2 ordinary process will be described. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 2 during process transition setting process.

  Special figure 2 during fluctuation processing shift setting processing, replacing “special figure 1” (special symbol 1) in special figure 1 fluctuation during processing shift setting processing (FIG. 52A) with “special figure 2” (special symbol 2) Since the process similar to the special process 1 during process transition setting process is performed, the detailed description is omitted. Steps A5201b to A5207b in the special figure 2 in-process change processing setting process correspond to steps A5201a to A5207a in the special figure 1 in-process change processing setting process.

[Process during special figure 1 change]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 during fluctuation process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the number of times of symbol determination number output by +1 (A 5301). The number of times of symbol determination number output is used in the symbol determination number signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special drawing 1 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and prepared as a presentation command (A5302), and a presentation command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is prepared as a presentation command (A5304), and a presentation command setting process is executed (A5305).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is the high probability final fluctuation (the high probability final fluctuation) (A5306). If the high probability final change flag is set in step A5108 of the high probability change number updating process, it can be determined as the high probability final change. When the special figure 1 change display game to start is the high probability final change (the result of A5306 is "Y"), it is displayed on the stop figure pattern of the special figure 1 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop figure of the special figure 1 The corresponding display time is set (A5307). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a special symbol of the missing symbol, 2000 msec if the special symbol 1 is a big hit symbol, and 136 msec if it is a small hit symbol of the special symbol 1 is there.

  When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is started is not the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5306 is “N”), game control control equipment 100 sets the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation as the display time of special figure 1 (A5308). For example, the display time at the time of the high probability final change is 7000 msec.

  After the steps A5307 and A5308, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is out (A5309). If the result of the special view 1 variation display game is a loss (the result of A5309 is "Y"), the information (stop symbol number at the time of removal) saved in the above special view 1 stop symbol setting process is a special view stop symbol Load from the save area and save in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

  If the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is not a loss (in the case of big hit or small hit) (result of A5309 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also moving special figure 2 (also special view 2 fluctuation display game) (A5310). When the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A5310 is "N"), it shifts to processing of Step A5320. If the special figure 2 is also changing (the result of A5310 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process described later is being executed (A5311).

  If the special game 2 display processing is being executed (the result of A531 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A5313. When the special figure 2 display process is not being executed (the result of A5311 is "N"), the number of times of symbol determination frequency output is updated by +1 (A5312). Subsequently, a display time of a value (display time of special figure 1 + 4 msec) obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 1 as the display time of special figure 2 is set (A5313) and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area Save time (A5314). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of the timer interrupt process. The addition of 4 msec is an extra addition because the special view 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special view 2 game processing (A3303). Thereby, the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made the same. In addition, if the stop display of the special figure 2 has already been started, the display time will be reset here (in principle, the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decorative special figure 2 as a rendering command (A5315), and executes rendering command setting processing (A5316). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is prepared as a presentation command (A5317), and a presentation command setting process is executed (A5318). After that, the special processing 2 during processing transition setting processing 2 for setting for executing the special processing 2 during processing is executed (A5319).

  By the processing of steps A5313 to A5319, in the special figure 1 fluctuation in process which is control related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the result of the removal of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is set , Execution of the processing while the special figure 2 is displayed (end of the special figure 2 variation display game) is set. Thus, even if the special view 2 variation display game is running (during special view 2 variation), if the special view 1 variation display game is hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure 2 variation display game Is forced to end by fluctuation (forced end) by the out result.

  It should be noted that the special figure 1 during fluctuation process is performed when the fluctuation time ends, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5009) times out (A3204 Since the result is executed to “Y”), the special figure 2 variation display game is forced to end the variation (forced termination) when the special figure 1 variation display game of the hit result stops changing.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads the decoration special figure 1 command from the decoration special figure 1 command area, and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5320). Next, it is determined whether the result of the special view 1 variation display game is a small hit (A5321). When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A5321 is "Y"), the information (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is specially figured 1 in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process described above. The special symbol 1 is loaded from the stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

If the result of the special view 1 variation display game is not a small hit (if it is a big hit) (if the result of A5321 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines the upper limit number of rounds from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area described above. Load value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5322),
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the special drawing 1 special winning opening opening information area described above, and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A 5323). Thereafter, information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324). Next, the special processing 1 during processing transition setting processing 1 for setting for executing the special processing 1 during processing is executed (A5325), and the special processing 1 during fluctuation processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (during the special figure 2 fluctuation), if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is hit, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is left It is a forced termination means to force termination on the result.

[Special figure 2 during processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 during fluctuation process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation processing.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determination times output times by +1 (A5401). The number of times of symbol determination number output is used in the symbol determination number signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5403). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is prepared as a production command (A5404), and a production command setting process is executed (A5405).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is the high probability final fluctuation (the high probability final fluctuation) (A5406). If the high probability final change flag is set in step A5108 of the high probability change number updating process, it can be determined as the high probability final change. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to start is not high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5406 is “N”), it corresponds to the stop design pattern of special figure 2 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop figure of special figure 2 The display time to be set is set (A5407). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is the special symbol 2 off pattern, 600 msec if the special symbol 2 big hit symbol, and 600 msec if the special symbol 2 small hit symbol is there. In addition, the display time of the out-of-the-box design of the special figure 2, the big hit design and the small hit design is the same.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which starts is high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5406 is “Y”), game control control equipment 100 sets the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation as the display time of special figure 2 (A5408). For example, the display time at the time of the high probability final change is 7000 msec.

  After the steps A5407 and A5408, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the result of the special view 2 variation display game is out (A5409). If the result of the special view 2 variation display game is a loss (the result of A5409 is "Y"), the information (stop symbol number at the time of removal) saved in the above special view 2 stop symbol setting process is a special view 2 stop symbol Load from the save area and save in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A 5424).

  If the game control device 100 does not lose the result of the special view 2 change display game (result of A5410 is "N"), whether the special view 1 is also changing (the special view 1 change display game is also being executed) Is determined (A5410). When the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5410 is "N"), it shifts to processing of Step A5420. If the special figure 1 is also changing (the result of A 5410 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the process of displaying the special figure 1 described later is being executed (A 5411).

  The game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A5413 when the special view 1 display processing is being executed (the result of A5411 is “Y”). When the special figure 1 display processing is not being executed (the result of A 5411 is “N”), the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by +1 (A 5412). Subsequently, a display time of a value (display time of special figure 2 + 4 msec) obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 2 as the display time of special figure 1 is set (A5413), and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area Save time (A5414). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of the timer interrupt process. The addition of 4 msec is an extra addition because the special view 1 game processing timer is updated by 1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special view 1 game processing (A3203). Thereby, the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. In addition, if the stop display of the special figure 1 has already been started, the display time will be reset here (in principle, the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the display of the special pattern 1 of the decorative special symbol 1 as a rendering command (A5415), and executes rendering command setting processing (A5416). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is prepared as a presentation command (A5417), and a presentation command setting process is executed (A5418). Thereafter, special processing 1 during processing transition setting processing 2 for setting for executing processing during special processing 1 display is executed (A5419).

  By the processing of steps A5413 to A5419, in the special figure 2 fluctuation processing which is control related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the result of losing the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is set , Execution of the processing during the special figure 1 display (termination of the special figure 1 variation display game) is set. Thus, even if the special view 1 variation display game is being executed (during special view 1 variation), if the special view 2 variation display game is hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure 1 variation display game Is forced to end by fluctuation (execution end).

  It should be noted that the special figure 2 during fluctuation processing ends the fluctuation time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times out (results of A3304 and A3305 Is executed to “Y”, and thus the special figure 1 variation display game is forced to end variation (execution end) when the special figure 2 variation display game of the hit result stops changing.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 2 command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5420). Next, it is determined whether the result of the special view 2 variation display game is a small hit (A 5421). When the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A 5421 is “Y”), the information (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is specially figured 2 in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process described above. The special symbol 2 is loaded from the stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A 5424).

If the result of the special view 2 variation display game is not a small hit (if it is a big hit) (if the result of A5421 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines the upper limit number of rounds from the above special figure 2 upper limit information area Load value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5422),
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area described above, and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A 5423). Thereafter, information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A 5424). Next, the special processing 2 during processing transition setting processing 1 for setting for executing the special processing 2 processing is executed (A 5425), and the special processing 2 during fluctuation processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, even if the special control 1 variation display game is being executed (during special control 1 variation), if the special view 2 variation display game is hit, the special control 1 variation display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination on the result.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special processing 1 display special processing 1 display processing during special processing 1 fluctuation processing (A5325) will be described. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process 1 during the special figure 1 display.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "2" as the processing number to shift to processing while the special figure 1 is displayed (A5501a), saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5502a), The signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 (off data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503a).

  Next, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the game control apparatus 100 stops the stop flag related to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51, and the special view 1 change control flag Save to the area (A5504a), and during special view 1 display processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special processing 2 in progress processing transition setting processing 1 (A 5425) in the special processing 2 in fluctuation processing will be described. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process 1 during the special figure 2 display.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "2" as the processing number to shift to processing while the special figure 2 is displayed (A5501b), saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5502b), The signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 (off data of the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503b).

  Next, as information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the game control apparatus 100 stops the stop flag related to the change stop in the special view 2 display 52, and the special view 2 change control flag Save to the area (A5504b), and during the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special processing 1 display special processing 2 display processing during special processing 2 fluctuation processing (A5419) will be described. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the procedure of a process shift setting process 2 during the special view 1 display. In the process transition setting process 2 during the special figure 1 display, information setting is performed when the special figure 1 variation display game is forced to end by hitting the special figure 2 variation display game.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "2" as a processing number to shift to processing while displaying a special figure 1 (A 5601a), saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A 5602a), The signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A 5603 a). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag region (A5604a ).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605a), clears the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (A5606a), and the special figure 1 big winning opening open information area Clear (A5607a). Further, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (A5608a), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A5609a). Subsequently, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (A 5610 a), and the special figure 1 stop symbol area saves the shifted stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of removal) (A 5611 a). By the above processing, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 becomes the fluctuation stop (variation end) with the stop symbol of the detachment.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special processing 2 in progress processing transition setting processing 2 (A5319) in the special processing 1 in fluctuation processing will be described. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process 2 during special figure 2 display. In the process transition setting process 2 during the special figure 2 display, the information setting is performed when the special figure 2 variation display game is forced to end by hitting of the special figure 1 variation display game.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "2" as the processing number to shift to processing while the special figure 2 is displayed (A5601b), saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5602b), The signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A 5603 b). Subsequently, as the information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 2 display 52 is saved in the special view 2 change control flag area (A5604b ).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605b), clears the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (A5606b), and the special figure 2 big winning opening open information area Clear (A5607b). Further, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A5608b), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A5609b). Subsequently, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (A5610b), and the special figure 2 stop symbol area is saved with the shifted stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of disconnection) (A5611b). By the above processing, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the fluctuation stop (variation end) with the stop symbol of the detachment.

[Process while displaying special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 in-display process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 57A and FIG. 57B are flowcharts showing the procedure of processing during display of the special view 1. FIG. 57A shows the first half of the special view 1 display processing, and FIG. 57B shows the second half of the special view 1 display processing.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first loads the small hit flag 1 (small hit information or show the drop information) from the small hit flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the small hit flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 area is loaded with the big hit flag 1 (showing big hit information or out information) (A 5703), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (A 5704). Subsequently, it is determined based on the big hit flag 1 whether the result of the special view 1 variation display game is a big hit (A5705).

  When the result of the special view 1 variation display game is a big hit (result of A5705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal regarding the start of the special view 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5706 ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 jackpot is the on data of the condition device operating signal, the on data of the character continuous operating device operating signal, and the on data of the special symbol 1 signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared as a rendering command (A5707), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A5708).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the round number upper limit table (A5709), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information of the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is extracted from the round number upper limit table Acquire and save in the round number upper limit value area of RWM (A5710). The round number upper limit is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information of the special figure 1 upper limit number information area is acquired from the round number upper limit table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5711).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads a hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5712), and executes an effect command setting process (A5713). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to a big hit symbol. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5714), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5715).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special winning opening open information and the signal corresponding to the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5716). The signals here are, for example, 2 signals for the jackpot and 3 signals for the jackpot that are turned on or off depending on the conditions. For example, two jackpot signals turn on at jackpots other than 2R, turn on at 2R jackpots in high probability, turn off at 2R jackpots in low probability, 3 jackpots turn on at jackpots other than 2R, high probability It turns off at the 2R jackpot in the middle and turns on at the 2R jackpot in the low probability.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (A5717), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special processing 1 game processing timer area (A5718). Next, it is determined based on the big winning opening opening information whether or not it is a big hit of the large winning opening opening to open the large winning opening (A 5719).

  If the game control apparatus 100 is a big hit for opening a large winning opening (the result of A5719 is "Y"), the upper winning opening unfair winning number area is cleared (A5720), the upper winning opening unfair monitoring period of RWM A flag area outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area (A5721), and "3" is set as a processing number to shift to fanfare / in-interval processing (A5724). If it is not a big hit of opening the top large winnings opening (Result of A5719 is "N"), clear the lower large winning opening unfair winning number area (A5722), outside the unfair monitoring period in the lower winning a prize opening unfair monitoring period flag area of RWM The flag is saved (A 5723), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to the processing during fanfare / interval (A 5724).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special processing 1 game processing number area (A 5725), executes the processing during the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (A 5726), and ends the processing during the special drawing 1 display. .

  On the other hand, when the result of the special view 1 variable display game is not a big hit (result of A5705 is "N"), the result of the special view 1 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 1 It is determined whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (A5727). If the result of the special view 1 change display game is a small hit (the result of A5727 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special view 1 change display game executed this time is a high probability final change (A5728). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time is the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5728 is “Y”), prepare the probability information command (low probability) as the rendering command (A5729) and execute the rendering command setting process (A5730).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the power failure recovery transmission command area of RWM (A5731), and clears the left hitting instruction notification flag (A5732). The power failure recovery transmission command area saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery. Thereafter, a hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5734). In addition, since the result of the special view 1 variation display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to a small hit symbol. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variation display game of this time is not the high probability final variation (the result of A5728 is “N”), the game control device 100 does not process steps A5729 to A5732 and hits from the hit symbol command area. The command is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5734).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as a rendering command (A5735), and executes rendering command setting processing (A5736). Subsequently, it is determined whether the hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (A5737). If it is not in the high probability state (the result of A5737 is "N"), save the signal (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A5738) In order to turn off the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10) to be notified, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area of the RWM (A5739). If it is in the high probability state (result of A5737 is "Y"), save the signal (on data of the launch position specification signal 1) related to the right strike instruction in the test signal output data area (A5740) and right strike In order to light up the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10) for informing the player, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (A5741).

  After steps A5739 and A5741, the game control apparatus 100 clears the lower large winning a prize opening illegal winning number area (A5742), saves the illegal monitoring over time flag in the lower large winning a prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (A5743), The special process 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition process setting process is executed (A 5744), and the special figure 1 display process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the result of the special view 1 variable display game is not a small hit (if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit) (the result of A5727 is "N"), that is, the special figure 1 variable display game If the result of is the case, it is judged whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time is the high probability final fluctuation (A5745). If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5745 is “N”), the process moves to a process of step A5753.

  If the game control apparatus 100 has a high probability final change (the result of A5745 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as a rendering command (A5746) and executes rendering command setting processing (A5747) . Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5748), and the left-handed command notification flag is cleared (A5749). After that, it is judged whether or not it is a small hit state of the special view 2 variation display game (A5750). When it is a small hit state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the result of A5750 is “Y”), it moves to the processing of step A5753.

  If the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special view 2 variation display game (the result of A5750 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A5751). Subsequently, in order to turn off the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10) notifying that it is a right strike time, save the number in the left striking state in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5752) Clear the special figure 1 fluctuation of the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5753). Thereafter, since the result of the special view 1 variation display game is lost, the special view 1 processing shift setting process 1 is executed (A 5754), and the special view 1 display processing is ended. In the special processing 1 transition processing setting processing 1, in order to shift to the special processing 1 normal processing, "0" is set as the processing number, and processing such as saving the processing number in the special processing 1 game processing number area is performed.

[Process during special figure 2 display]
Next, details of the special figure 2 in-display process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 58A and FIG. 58B are flowcharts showing the procedure of processing during display of the special view 2. FIG. 58A shows the first half of the special view 2 display process, and FIG. 58B shows the second half of the special view 2 display process.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first loads the small hit flag 2 (showing small hit information or release information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801), and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Subsequently, the big hit flag 2 area is loaded with the big hit flag 2 (showing big hit information or out information) (A 5803), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (A 5804). Subsequently, it is determined based on the big hit flag 2 whether or not the result of the special view 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5805).

  When the result of the special view 2 variation display game is a big hit (result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the start of the special view 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806 ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the on data of the condition device operating signal, the on data of the character continuous operating device operating signal, the on data of the special symbol 2 signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared as a rendering command (A5807), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A5808).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the round number upper limit table (A5809), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information of the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is extracted from the round number upper limit table Acquire and save in the RWM round number upper limit area (A5810). The round number upper limit is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information of the special figure 2 upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit table and saved in the round LED pointer area of RWM (A5811).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads a hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5812), and executes an effect command setting process (A5813). In addition, since the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to a big hit symbol. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as a rendering command (A5814), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A5815).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special winning opening open information and a signal corresponding to the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5816). The signals here are, for example, 2 signals for the jackpot and 3 signals for the jackpot that are turned on or off depending on the conditions. For example, two jackpot signals turn on at jackpots other than 2R, turn on at 2R jackpots in high probability, turn off at 2R jackpots in low probability, 3 jackpots turn on at jackpots other than 2R, high probability It turns off at the 2R jackpot in the middle and turns on at the 2R jackpot in the low probability.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (A 5817), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A 5818). Next, it is determined based on the big winning opening opening information whether or not it is a big hit of the large winning opening opening to open the large winning opening (A 5819).

  If the game control apparatus 100 is a big hit for opening a large winning opening (the result of A5819 is "Y"), the upper winning opening unfair winning number area is cleared (A5820), the upper winning opening unfair monitoring period of RWM The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the flag area (A5821), and "3" is set as a processing number to shift to fanfare / in-interval processing (A5824). If it is not a big hit of opening the top large winnings opening (result of A5819 is "N"), clear the lower large winning opening unfair winning number area (A 5822), outside the unfair monitoring period in the lower winning a prize opening unfair monitoring period flag area of RWM The flag is saved (A5823), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to the processing during fanfare / interval (A5824).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A 5825), executes the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process (A 5826), and ends the special figure 2 display processing. .

  On the other hand, when the result of the special view 2 variable display game is not a big hit (result of A5805 is "N"), the result of the special view 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2 It is determined whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (A5827). If the result of the special view 2 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A5827 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special view 2 variation display game executed this time is a high probability final variation (A5828). When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time is the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5828 is “Y”), prepare the probability information command (low probability) as the rendering command (A5829) and execute the rendering command setting process (A5830).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the power failure recovery transmission command area of RWM (A5831), and clears the left hitting instruction notification flag (A5832). Thereafter, the hit symbol command area is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5834). In addition, since the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to a small hit symbol. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game this time special game 2 fluctuation indication game is not high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5828 is N), processing of step A5829 to A5832 is not done, but command from hit symbol command territory The hit symbol is loaded and prepared as a rendering command (A5833), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A5834).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5835), and executes an effect command setting process (A5836). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (A5837). If it is not in the high probability state (the result of A5837 is "N"), save the signal (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) related to the leftward command in the test signal output data area (A5838) and indicate that it is right In order to turn off the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10) to be notified, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5839). If it is in the high probability state (result of A5837 is "Y"), save the signal (on data of the launch position specification signal 1) related to the rightward command in the test signal output data area (A5840) and right when In order to light up the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10) for informing the player, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (A5841).

  After steps A5839 and A5841, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (A5842). If it is a small hit that opens the large winning prize opening (result of A5842 is "Y"), clear the large winning prize opening illegal prize number area (A5843), illegal monitoring period in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area The outside flag is saved (A5844), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process is executed (A5847), and the special figure 2 display process is ended. If it is not a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (the result of A5842 is "N"), that is, it is a small hitting that opens the lower large winning opening, clear the lower large winning opening illegal prize number area (A5845) , Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period flag area in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5846), execute the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (A5847), and end the special figure 2 display processing .

  On the other hand, if the result of the special view 2 variable display game is not a small hit (if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5827 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game If the result of is negative, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time is the high probability final fluctuation (A5848). If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5848 is “N”), the process moves to the processing of step A5856.

  If the game control apparatus 100 has a high probability final change (the result of A5848 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5849) and executes an effect command setting process (A5850) . Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5851), and the left hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (A5852). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small figure state of the special view 1 variation display game is present (A5853). When it is a small hit state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A5853 is “Y”), it moves to the processing of step A5856.

  When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special view 1 variation display game (the result of A5853 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A5854). Subsequently, in order to turn off the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10) notifying that it is time to hit the right, save the number in the left state in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5855) Clear the special figure 2 fluctuation of the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5856). Thereafter, since the result of the special view 2 variation display game is lost, the special view 2 normal process shift setting process 1 is executed (A5857), and the special view 2 display processing is ended. In the special processing 2 transition processing setting processing 1, in order to shift to the special processing 2 normal processing, "0" is set as the processing number, and processing such as saving the processing number in the special processing 2 game processing number area is performed.

[Fanfare / Inter-Intermediate Process Transition Setting Process]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process shift setting process (A5726, A5826) in the process of displaying the special view 1 and the process of displaying the special view 2 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the fan transfer / interval process transfer setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves the signal (big data 1 signal on data) regarding the start of the big hit in the external information output data area (A 5901), and saves the signal regarding the high probability & short time end in the test signal output data area. (A5902), clear the number of rounds area managing the number of rounds in the RWM (A5903).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the number in the low probability in the gaming state display number area (A5904), and saves the special figure low probability & time saving none flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5905). By setting the special figure low probability & time saving none flag, the hit probability becomes a low probability, and the time saving state is achieved (the time saving state is eliminated). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A5906), and the high probability number of times of fluctuation is held in RWM. The probability fluctuation number area is cleared (A5907).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the information on the big hit in the special view status area (A5908), and clears the high probability final change flag area holding the high probability final change flag in the RWM (A5909). Subsequently, the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8) saves the signal (on data of the firing position designation signal 1) relating to the right strike instruction in the test signal output data area (A5910) and notifies that it is right strike. In order to turn on D10), the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (A5911).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (A5912), and holds the special figure 2 abnormal number area in which the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is held in RWM. 0 clear (A5913), special figure 1 holding the number of fluctuations in RWM clears the special figure 1 fluctuation count area 0 (A5914), special figure 2 holds the value of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer in RWM The variation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (A5915), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special processing 1 small hit fanfare during processing transition setting processing (A 5744) in the special processing 1 display processing will be described. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing a procedure of special process 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "7" as a processing number to shift to processing during small hit fanfare (A6001a), and saves the processing number in the special view 1 game processing number area (A6002a). Subsequently, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (A6003a), and the signal (on data of the big hit 1 signal) related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area. (A6004a).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal (special data of small symbol on small data on special symbol 1 small hit start) in the test signal output data area (A6005a), and the small figure in the special status status area is small. Save the information (A6006a). Furthermore, the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6007a), and the special image 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the special processing 2 small hit fanfare during processing transition setting processing (A5847) in the special processing 2 display processing will be described. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing a procedure of special process 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process.

  Special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) in special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (Fig. 60A) "special figure 2" (special symbol 2) Since the processing similar to the special processing 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing is performed, the detailed description is omitted. Steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process respectively correspond to steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, details of the fanfare / in-interval process (A3211, A3314) in the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare / during interval processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A6101). Since the number of rounds is set to 0 in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process (A5903), it is 0 before the start of the current big hit operation. Thereafter, a special winning opening information and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared as a rendering command (A6102), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A6103).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the big hit middle processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the round number (A6104), and saves it in the big hit middle processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6105). Here, in the case of a pattern that repeats opening and closing of the big winning opening during one round, 0 is set as an initial value, and in the case of a pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once in one round, the initial value is suddenly upper limit Set the value (= 21). In addition, in the case of the pattern which repeats opening and closing, even if it is not 0 as an initial value, a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit may be used (that is, start from an intermediate value). Moreover, it is good also as a pattern which repeats opening and closing to one of an upper large winning a prize opening and a lower large winning a prize opening, and it is good also as a pattern opened only once with respect to the other. Or a pattern that opens only once.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special winning opening open time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds (A6106). Subsequently, “4” is set as the processing number to shift to the special winning opening open processing (A6107), and it is determined whether or not the special view 1 variation display game is a big hit (A6108). If the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (result of A6108 is "Y"), save this processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6109), special winning opening open time special figure 1 game processing Save in the timer area (A6110). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (result of A6108 is “N”), save this processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6111), special winning opening open time special figure 2 game processing timer Save to the area (A6112).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper large winning opening based on the large winning opening opening information (A6113). If it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (result of A6113 is "Y"), the processing transition setting processing 1 during large winning opening open is executed (A6114), and the fanfare / interval middle processing is ended. If it is not a big hit to open the top large winning opening (the result of A6113 is "N"), that is, if it is a big hit to open the bottom large winning opening, execute the process transition setting processing 2 during large winning opening open (A6115) , End the process during fanfare / interval. In the present embodiment, there are two types of big hit that opens only the top big winning opening and big hit that opens only the bottom big winning opening, but a big hit that opens both the top big winning opening and the bottom big winning opening is provided. Configuration is also possible.

[In process opening setting process 1 during the big winning opening open]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 1 (A6114) in the fanfare / interval processing will be described. FIG. 62A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process 1 during the special winning opening open process.

  The game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the opening of the winning opening in the large winning opening (on data of the signal during the special electric character 1 operation) in the test signal output data area (A6201a), and in the RWM large winning opening solenoid output data area The big winning opening on data is saved to turn on the big winning opening solenoid 39b (A6202a), the big winning opening count number is cleared (A6203a), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[In process opening setting process 2 during the big winning opening open]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 2 (A6115) in the fanfare / interval processing will be described. FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process 2 during the special winning opening open process.

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the signal (on data of the signal during the special electric character 2 operation) in the test signal output data area (A 6201 b) in the RWM's large winning opening solenoid output data area. The lower large winning opening solenoid 38b is turned on, the lower large winning opening on data is saved (A6202b), the large winning opening count number is cleared (A6203b), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open processing (A3212, A3315) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening open process.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first loads and prepares the big hit middle processing control pointer (A6301), and determines whether the value of the big hit middle processing control pointer loaded is equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (for example, 21). (A6302). If the value of the big hit medium process control pointer is less than the big hit operation end value (A6302's result is “N”), the big hit medium process control pointer is updated by +1 (A6303), and the big hit medium big hit is performed according to the process control pointer Operation shift setting processing is executed (A6304), and the special winning opening open processing is ended.

  If the value of the processing control pointer for the big hit is equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (the result of A6302 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the current round is the final round (A6305). If the number of rounds (A 6101) updated by +1 during the fanfare / interval is the final number of rounds (for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R), it can be determined that the final round.

  When it is not the final round (the result of A6305 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an interval command as an effect command (A6306), and executes an effect command setting process (A6308). If it is the final round (the result of A6305 is "Y"), an ending command is prepared as a rendering command (A6307), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A6308).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening information (A6309), and sets "5" as the processing number to shift to the special winning opening residual ball processing (A6310). ). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special view 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (A6311). When it is a big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A6311 is “Y”), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6312), the remaining ball processing time is special figure 1 game processing timer Save to area (A6313). If the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (result of A6311 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6314), the remaining ball processing time is special figure 2 game processing timer area Save to (A6315).

  After steps A6313 and A6315, the game control apparatus 100 saves off data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area to turn off both the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (A6316), The special winning opening open processing ends.

[Big hit operation shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the big hit operation shift setting process (A6304) in the process of opening the special winning opening will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the procedure of the big hit operation shift setting process.

  First, the gaming control device 100 performs branching by means of the processing control pointer during the big hit (A6401). During the big hit, the process control pointer can use not the current value but the value before +1 updating in step A6303. If the value of the big hit middle process control pointer is even, the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the big hit middle process control pointer is set (A 6402), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A 6403).

  When the value of the big hit middle processing control pointer is an odd number, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets a big winning opening opening time corresponding to the middle hit middle processing control pointer (A6404). For example, the large winning opening opening time is 200 msec when the big hit middle processing control pointer is 1 to 19 (big hit middle processing control pointer = 1 to 19), the big hit middle processing control pointer is 21 (big hit middle processing control pointer = 21) In the case of 25000 msec. The special winning opening opening time of 200 msec is used in the case of a pattern in which the short opening and closing of the special winning opening is repeated during one round. Subsequently, the upper winning prize opening on data for turning on the upper winning prize opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6405). As a result, the upper prize winning opening can repeat opening and closing for a short time. In this case, when the lower prize winning opening repeats opening and closing for a short time, the lower winning prize opening on data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area, the lower winning prize opening on data and the upper winning prize on A configuration that saves both of the data is also possible.

  After steps A6403 and A6405, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special view 1 variation display game is a big hit (A6406). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A6406 is "Y"), the set time (wait time or big winning opening opening time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6407). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of A6406 is "N"), that is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6408 ).

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening game game (A3213, A3316) in the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special winning opening residual ball processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round (A6501). If it is not the final round (the result of A6501 is "N"), test signal output of signal related to the special winning opening open end (off data of special electric combination 1 operating signal and off data of special electric combination 2 operating signal) Save in the data area (A6502), set the interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds (A6503), and set "3" as the processing number to shift to fanfare / in-interval processing (A6504) ). Thus, the fanfare / interval processing, the special winning opening open processing, and the special winning opening residual ball processing are repeated until the final round is reached. The interval period between the rounds is the period from the end of the round to the passage of the big winning a prize remaining ball processing time and the interval time.

  When it is the final round (the result of A6501 is "Y"), game control control 100 executes the big hit end processing shift setting processing in order to shift to the big hit end processing (A6505), the ending time which corresponds to stop design pattern Is set (A6506), and "6" is set as the process number (A6507). By this, it is possible to shift to the big hit end processing. The length of the ending period is the sum of the ending time and the big winning opening remaining ball processing time, and in this ending period, the ending effect is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

  After steps A6504 and A6507, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special view 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (A6508). When it is a big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A 6508 is “Y”), the set processing number (“3” or “6”) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A 6509) and set The special time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (A6510), and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

  If the game control device 100 is not a big hit of the special view 1 variable display game (the result of A6508 is "N"), that is, if it is a big hit of the special view 2 variable display game, the processing number ("3" or "6" ) Is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6511), the set time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6512), and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended. .

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process shift setting process (A 6505) in the special winning opening residual ball process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the procedure of the big hit end process shift setting process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal relating to the end of the special winning opening open (off data of the special electric combination 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric combination 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area ( A6601) Clear the large winning opening count number area holding the large winning opening count number in the RWM (A6602), and clear the round number area (A6603). Subsequently, the round number upper limit value area is cleared (A6604), the round number upper limit value information area is cleared (A6605), the special winning opening open information area is cleared (A6606), and the large hit middle processing control pointer area is cleared. (A6607).

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special view 1 game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 1 jackpot end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “0” as a processing number to return to the special processing 1 routine processing (A6701), and saves the processing number in the special processing 1 game processing number area (A6702). Subsequently, save the signals regarding the end of the big hit (off data of the big hit 1 signal and off data of the big hit 3) in the external information output data area (A6703), the signal regarding the high probability & the start of the short time (output from the big hit (2) to continuously output the "big hit" signal 2) in the external information output data area (A 6704).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6705). The signals relating to the end of the big hit are, for example, the off data of the condition device operating signal, the off data of the character continuous operating device operating signal, and the off data of the special symbol 1 signal. Subsequently, a signal related to the high probability & short start is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706). Here, signals relating to the start of high probability & short time are, for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal . After that, the signal (fire position designation signal 1) related to the right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (A6707).

  Subsequently, the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the number in the high probability in the gaming state display number area (A6708), saves the number in the right hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (A6709), and the round LED pointer Save the unlit number in the area (A6710). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6711), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag region (A6712). Clear the area (A6713)

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the state after the big hit state as the high probability state (probable change state) (A6714). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only a definite symbol, and after the jackpot ends, it becomes a high probability state and also becomes a short time state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability fluctuation number is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area for holding the high probability fluctuation number (A6715). Thereafter, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (A6716).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6717), and ends the special figure 1 big hit end process. This special figure 2 game wait time value delays the determination of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 special process during the special game 2 game process) at the time of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) It is set to. Here, the special view 2 game wait time value is 8 msec which is twice the interrupt cycle (that is, 2 as a value saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area).

  Assuming that the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (S13 in FIG. 12) performed immediately after the special figure 1 game process (A1310 in FIG. 12) in which the special figure 1 big hit end process is executed. Since the determination of the start of the change of the special view 2 change display game is started at A1311 of FIG. 12 (started within the current timer interrupt processing), the special view 2 change display game is more effective than the special view 1 change display game. It may be a problem if it starts first. The special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end process, so it remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the start of the change of the special view 1 change display game is performed in the next timer interrupt process (the special view 1 special process during the special view 1 game process).

  The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to a time (8 msec) twice as long as the interrupt cycle, but the special figure 2 game process (started within the current timer interrupt process) immediately after the special figure 1 game process of this time 2) the game processing timer is updated by 1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game process in the next timer interrupt process, the special figure 2 game process timer is further updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) and becomes 0 (result of A3304 is "Y"), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game The determination of the change start of (special figure 2 special processing during special figure 2 game processing) is performed. Thereby, in the next timer interrupt processing after the big hit state end by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game fluctuation start decision (special figure 1 game processing and special drawing When the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can simultaneously start variation. As described above, while the special figure 1 variation display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped with the out-of-design symbol (forced termination or originally no variation).

  If there is no problem with game control even if the special view 2 variable display game starts before the special view 1 variable display game after the big hit state ends, the process of step A6717 is omitted, It is not necessary to set the game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "0" as a processing number to return to the special view 2 normal processing (A6801), and saves the processing number in the special view 2 game processing number area (A6802). Subsequently, save the signals regarding the end of the big hit (off data of the big hit 1 signal and off data of the big hit 3) in the external information output data area (A6803), the signal regarding high probability & start of short time (output from inside of big hit (2) to continuously output the "big hit" signal 2) in the external information output data area (A 6804).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6805). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot is, for example, the off data of the condition device operating signal, the off data of the character continuous operating device operating signal, the off data of the special symbol 2 signal. Subsequently, a signal relating to the high probability & short start is saved in the test signal output data area (A6806). Here, signals relating to the start of high probability & short time are, for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal . After that, the signal (fire position designation signal 1) related to the right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (A6807).

  Subsequently, the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the high probability number in the gaming state display number area (A6808), saves the right hitting state number in the gaming state display number 2 area (A6809), and the round LED pointer Save the unlit number in the area (A6810). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6811), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6812). Clear the area (A6813)

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the state after the big hit state as the high probability state (probable change state) (A6814). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only a definite symbol, and after the jackpot ends, it becomes a high probability state and also becomes a short time state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability fluctuation number is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area for holding the high probability fluctuation number (A6815). Thereafter, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery time transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6816).

  In the special figure 2 big hit end processing, it is not necessary to set the special figure 1 game wait time value. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0, and in the next timer interrupt process, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game fluctuation start If the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game start fluctuation at the same time. It is because you can do it.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3215, A3318) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the small hitting fanfare process.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first performs branching according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening by the small hit (special figure 1 small hit, special figure 2 small hit 1, 2 or 3) (A6901). The opening pattern of the big winning opening by the small hit corresponds to the small hit stop symbol number (A4312a, A4312b) or the small hit symbol (stop pattern of A4313a, A4313b).

  When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the small hit open command of the lower large winning opening open as the effect command (A6902), and executes the effect command setting process ( A6903). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A 6904), the processing number is saved in the special view 1 game processing number area (A 6905), and the small hit opening time 1 (eg 48 msec) is set as the opening time of the big winning opening. Special Figure 1 Save in the game processing timer area (A6906). Then, save the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (on data of the special motorized product 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6907), and select the lower winning prize on data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. Save (A6908).

  When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 1, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the small hit open command of the lower large winning opening open as the effect command (A6909), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6910). Next, set "8" as the processing number (A6911), save the processing number in the special view 2 game processing number area (A6912), and open the small hit opening time 2 (for example, 1600 msec) as the opening time of the big winning opening. Special Figure 2: Save in the game processing timer area (A6913). Then, save the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (on data of the special motorized product 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6914), and select the lower winning prize on data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Save (A6915).

  When the opening pattern by small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a small hit open command of upper large winning opening opening as an effect command (A6916), and executes effect command setting processing (A6917). Next, set "8" as the processing number (A6918), save the processing number in the special view 2 game processing number area (A6919), open small hit opening time 3 (for example, 1200 msec) as the opening time of the big winning opening Special Figure 2: Save in the game processing timer area (A6920). Then, save the signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (special data on the electric motor 1 active signal on data) in the test signal output data area (A6921), and select the large winning opening on data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. Save (A6922).

  When the opening pattern by small hitting is the special figure 2 small hitting 3, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a small hitting open command of upper large winning a prize opening opening as an effect command (A6923), and executes effect command setting processing (A6924). Next, set "8" as the process number (A6925), save the process number in the special view 2 game process number area (A6926), open small hit time 4 (for example, 1600 msec) as the open time of the big winning opening Special Figure 2: Save in the game processing timer area (A6927). Then, save the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (on data of the special motorized product 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6928), and select the big winning opening on data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. Save (A6929).

  After steps A6908, A6915, A6922 and A6929, the game control apparatus 100 clears the special winning opening count number area (A6930), and ends the small hit fanfare in-progress process.

  As described above, the small hit is released by the small hit for each small hit open pattern type corresponding to the small hit stop symbol number or the small hit symbol (special figure 1 small hit, special figure 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) The winning opening (one of the upper large winning opening and the lower large winning opening) and the opening time of the large winning opening (small hit opening time) are determined. In the present embodiment, the control pointer is not set, and only the small hit opening pattern where the big winning opening opens only once, but the control pointer is set as in the case of the big hitting, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening is performed. There may be repeated small hit open patterns. In addition, by setting “8” as the process number, it is possible to shift to the small hit middle processing after the end of the small hit fanfare middle processing.

[Small hit during processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process in the small hit middle process (A3216, A3319) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the small hit middle process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a small hit end screen command as a rendering command (A7001), and executes rendering command setting processing (A7002). As a result, the effect control device 300 that has received the small hit end screen command can display the small hit end screen on the display device 41.

  Next, the gaming control device 100 performs branching according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening by small hit (special figure 1 small hit, special figure 2 small hit 1, 2 or 3) (A7003).

  The game control apparatus 100 sets "9" as the processing number (A7004) and saves the processing number in the special processing 1 game processing number area when the opening pattern by the small hit is the special drawing 1 small hit (A7005) The small hit residual ball processing time 1 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (A7006). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A7007), and the small hitting middle processing ends.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets "9" as the processing number (A7008) and saves the processing number in the special processing 2 game processing number area when the opening pattern by the small hit is the special drawing 2 small hit 1 (A7009). And small hit residual ball processing time 2 (for example, 600 msec) are saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7010). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A7011), and the small hitting middle processing ends.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets "9" as the processing number (A7012) when the opening pattern by small hitting is special drawing 2 small hitting 2 or special drawing 2 small hitting 3 (A7012), it is in the special figure 2 game processing number area. The processing number is saved (A7013), and the small hit residual ball processing time 3 (for example, 800 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7014). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A7015), and the small hitting middle processing ends.

  In addition, by setting “9” as the process number, it is possible to shift to the small hit residual ball processing after the small hit middle processing ends.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (A3217, A3320) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the procedure of small hit residual ball processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether it is a small hit of the special view 1 variation display game (A7101). If it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A7101 is "Y"), set "10" as the processing number (A7102), save this processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A A7103) The small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (A7104).

  If the game control device 100 is not a small hit of the special view 1 variable display game (the result of A7101 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit of the special view 2 variable display game, set "10" as the processing number The processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7106), and the small hitting ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7107).

  After the steps A7104 and A7107, the game control apparatus 100 tests the signal regarding the end of the small hitting operation (off data of the special electric symbol 1 in operation signal and off data of the special electric symbol 2 in operation signal) as test signal output data The game is saved in the area (A7108), the big winning opening count number area is cleared (A7109), and the small hit residual ball processing is ended. In addition, by setting “10” as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hitting end processing after the small hitting residual ball processing ends.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view 1 small hitting end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets "0" as a process number to return to the special figure 1 normal process (A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A7202). Then, save the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A7203), and save the flag during the incorrect monitoring period in the lower large prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region (A7204). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7205), and the special view status area is cleared (A7206).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the hit probability is in the high probability state (A7207). If it is in the high probability state (the result of A7207 is "Y"), the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210). If it is not in the high probability state (the result of A7207 is "N"), save the signal (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A7208). The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7209), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210).

  Here, for the same reason as step A6717 in the special figure 1 big hit end process (FIG. 67), 8 msec (time 2 for the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area) which is twice the interrupt cycle is The special figure 2 game waiting time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Thereby, in the next timer interrupt processing after the small hitting state end by the special figure 1 variation display game, the determination start of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game fluctuation start (special figure 1 game processing and special figure When the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can simultaneously start variation.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hitting end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hitting end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets "0" as a processing number to return to the special view 2 normal processing (A7301), and saves the processing number in the special view 2 game processing number area (A7302). Then, save the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A 7303), and save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (A7304) The flag for the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7305). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7306), and the special image status area is cleared (A7307).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is a high probability state (A7308). When it is a high probability state (the result of A7308 is "Y"), special figure 2 small hitting end processing ends. If it is not in the high probability state (the result of A7308 is "N"), save the signal (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A7309). The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7310), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is ended.

  It is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit termination process for the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit termination process (FIG. 68).

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (A3220, A3323) in the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the symbol variation control process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special figure 1 (special symbol 1) or the special figure 2 (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

  In the game control apparatus 100, first, the special figure fluctuation control flag according to the special figure (for example, special figure 1) to be controlled among the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is a flag during fluctuation (a flag showing fluctuation) It is checked whether or not it is (A7401). If it is in the process of fluctuation, the flag during the fluctuation is saved in the fluctuation control flag area (A5205a, A5205b).

  Then, as a result of the check, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the special figure fluctuation control flag is the fluctuation flag (A7402), and when the special figure fluctuation control flag is the fluctuation flag (A7402 A symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the special figure (for example, special figure 1) to be controlled is obtained (A7403). The address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Furthermore, of the special figures 1 and 2, the blinking control timer according to the special figure (for example, special figure 1) to be controlled is updated by -1 (A7404), and the value of the timer is 0, ie, time is up It is determined whether or not (A7405).

  When the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (the result of A7405 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 acquires display data corresponding to the value of the target symbol number area (A7408). If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (the result of A7405 is "Y"), the blink control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the blink control timer area to be controlled (A7406). Furthermore, of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol number during variation related to the special figure (for example, special figure 1) to be controlled is updated by +1 and saved in the figure number area of variation (A7407). The display data corresponding to the value of the symbol number area is acquired during the fluctuation of (A7408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6A, the variable display game in which the non-lighting symbol (during variation symbol number = 0) and the lighting symbol (during variation symbol number = 1) is to be controlled is a special figure display Control unit (special display 1 display 51 or special display 2 display 52). In addition, the initial value of the symbol number during fluctuation is set to 0 which shows the non-lighting symbol of FIG. 5, for example (A5207a, A5207b).

  On the other hand, when the game control device 100 does not have the flag during the special figure change flag (the result of A7402 is "N"), the symbol display table (for example, the special figure 1) corresponding to the control target (for example, special figure 1) To stop (A7409). The address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Then, display data corresponding to the value (stop symbol number) of the target stop symbol area is acquired (A7410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6A, the special view display to be controlled among the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 (the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display The stop symbol of the special figure corresponding to the stop symbol number is displayed on the container 52). In the stop symbol area, a stop symbol number is saved corresponding to a big hit, a small hit, or a drop (A 5324, A 5424).

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the round display unit 53 provided in the batch display device 50, the special view 1 suspension display (memory display unit) 54, the first gaming state display unit 55, the second gaming state display unit 56, etc. Perform settings related to driving of the segment LED.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a special figure 1 pending number table in which the display mode in the special figure 1 pending display 54 is defined (A 7501), and acquires display data corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number. Save in the segment area of the special view 1 reserve display (A 7502).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit 53 is defined (A7503), acquires display data corresponding to the round LED pointer, and sets the segment area of the round display unit 53. Save (A7504).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the gaming state display table 1 in which the display mode in the first gaming state display unit 55 is defined (A7505). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number in the game state display number area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 55 (A 7506). Thereby, in the first gaming state display unit 55, the high probability state or the low probability state can be displayed.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode in the second game state display unit 56 is defined (A7507). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 in the game state display number 2 area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game state display unit 56 (A7508), and the segment LED editing process is ended. As a result, it is possible to display in the second gaming state display unit 56 that it is time to hit the right or to hit the left.

  In the case where the third game state display unit 57 indicating that the variable display game is being interrupted is provided corresponding to a modification described later, the game control apparatus 100 displays the display on the third game state display unit 57. A game state display table in which a mode is defined is set, and display data corresponding to whether or not the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game is being interrupted is acquired, and the third game state display unit 57 You may save in the segment area of

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start or the end of fraud notification is set.

  In the gaming control apparatus 100, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is turned on, ie, abnormal, from the state of the detection signal which is output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (A7601).

  When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A7601 is “Y”), that is, when detecting an abnormal magnetism, the game control device 100 counts a magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts an abnormal magnetism detection period by +1. After updating (A7602), it is determined whether the timer has timed up (A7603).

  The game control apparatus 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (the result of A7603 is “Y”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period ( A7604) Save the magnet fraud alert timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) in the magnet fraud alert timer area (A7605).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a command of magnet informing notification as a rendering command (A7606), and prepares a magnet injustice occurrence flag as a magnet injustice flag indicating that the magnet injustice has occurred (A7607). Furthermore, it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (A7613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality occurs.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (result of A7601 is "N"), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the game control apparatus 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer. (A7608). Then, if the magnet fraud notification timer defining the notification time of the magnet fraud is not 0, -1 is updated (A 7609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud alert timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is 0 (A7610). Also in the case where the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (the result of A7603 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A7609.

  If the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is not 0 (the result of A 7610 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

  In addition, when the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (the result of A 7610 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is a period of fraud alert If the informing notification is not performed from the beginning or the command of the magnet informing notification end is prepared as a rendering command (A7611).

  Further, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (A7612), and determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613).

  Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A 7613 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A 7613 is “N”), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (A 7614), and the rendering command setting is made. The process is executed (A7615). Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing a procedure of board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is judged based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

  In the gaming control apparatus 100, the radio wave sensor 62 is turned on from the state of the detection signal which is output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121. It is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (A7701). If the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A7701 is "Y"), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area ( A7702).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a command of board radio wave injustice notification as a rendering command (A7703), and prepares a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag indicating that board radio wave fraud has occurred as a board radio wave fraud flag (A7704). Furthermore, it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (A7709). That is, unlike the case of the magnetic fraud, in the case of the radio wave fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (result of A7701 is "N"), that is, when the game control device 100 does not detect an abnormal radio wave, the radio wave informing timer for defining the notification time of the radio wave illegitimate If is not 0, -1 is updated (A7705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is 0 (A 7706). If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not 0 (the result of A 7706 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended.

  In addition, when the value of the radio wave informing timer is 0 (the result of A 7706 is “Y”), that is, the time is up or the time is already up, and the game control apparatus 100 is a period of informing of fraud. If the informing notification has not been performed from the beginning, the radio wave informing notification end command is prepared as a rendering command (A7707). Furthermore, a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A7708), and it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (A7709).

  Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A 7709 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. If the values do not match (the result of A7709 is "N"), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A7710), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A7711). After that, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1315) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, information based on the monitoring result in payout command transmission process (A1305), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (A1308), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313), board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1314) Information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or a game arcade internal control device or a test shot test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (A7801). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A7801 is "N"), it is determined whether the main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A7802). If the main frame opening error is not occurring (result of A7802 is "N"), the off data of door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7803), the off data of security signal is external information output data Save to the area (A7804).

  If a glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A7801 is “Y”), or if a main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A7802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 is a door or a door. The on data of the frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A 7805), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A 7806).

  After steps A7804 and A7806, the game control apparatus 100 updates the security signal control timer by 1 if the timer is not 0 (A7807), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether time is up or not). It is determined (A7808). As the initial value of the security signal control timer, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like (A1026 of the main processing). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization.

  If the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A7808 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A7809). If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A7808 is "N"), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A7809 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the switch abnormality error is occurring (A7811). If frame radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A7809 is “Y”), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. If a switch abnormal error is occurring (the result of A7811 is "Y"), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7812), and the process proceeds to step A7813.

  When the switch abnormal error is not occurring (the result of A7811 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the magnet irregularity is occurring (A7813). When the magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A7813 is “N”), it is further determined whether board radio fraud is occurring (A7814). When the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio wave fraud is occurring.

  When the board radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A7814 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the special winning opening irregularity is in progress (A7815). It should be noted that if the incorrect prize occurrence flag for the special winning opening (upper large winning opening or lower large winning opening) is saved in the incorrect flag area, it can be determined that the special winning opening is in progress. If there is no big winning opening fraud occurring (result of A7815 is "N"), it is further determined whether the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation (special figure 2 abnormal display state of abnormal execution state) is occurring ( A7816). When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag region, it can be determined that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring. In the case where the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is not occurring (the result of A7816 is “N”), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7817).

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A7813 is "Y"), when the board radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A7814 is "Y"), the special winning opening fraud is If it is occurring (result of A7815 is "Y") or if special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (result of A7816 is "Y"), ON data of security signal is in external information output data area Save (A7 0 18) and save the on data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A 7 0 19). By setting the on data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After steps A7817 and A7 0 19, the game control apparatus 100 edits the starting opening 1 signal (A 7 0 20), the starting opening 2 signal editing (A 7 0 21), and the main prize ball signal editing (A 7 0 22) performs symbol determined number signal editing processing (A7 0 23), and ends the external information editing process. The starting opening 1 signal editing processing is processing when there is an input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the starting opening 2 signal editing processing is a processing when there is an input of the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

[Starting opening 1 signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening 1 signal editing process (A7020) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening 1 signal editing process.

  If the game control device 100 is not 0, the game control device 100 first updates −1 if it is not 0 (A7901). The minimum value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (A7902).

  When the value of the start opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A7902 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of times of start opening 1 signal output is 0 (A7903 ). Then, when the number of times of start port 1 signal output is not 0 (the result of A7903 is "N"), the number of times of start port 1 signal output is updated by -1 (A7904) 1) Save the initial value of the signal output control timer (A7905).

  The start port 1 signal output control timer initial value is a time (for example, 128 msec) obtained by adding the time of the on state (for example, high level) of the start port 1 signal and the time of the off state (for example, low level).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves on data for turning on the starting opening 1 signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7907), and ends the starting opening 1 signal editing process.

  In addition, when the number of times the start port 1 signal is output is 0 (the result of A7903 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 performs off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device to the outside of RWM. The data is saved in the information output data area (A7908), and the start opening 1 signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value of the start opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A7902 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the start opening 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period or not. Is determined (A7906). The fact that the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section (the result of A7906 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs the on data for turning on the starting opening 1 signal to the external information of RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A7907), and the start opening 1 signal editing process is ended.

  In addition, when the start opening 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on section (the result of A7906 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the off data for turning off the start opening 1 signal for the external device. Save in the external information output data area of RWM (A7908), and finish the start port 1 signal editing process.

[Starting opening 2 signal editing process]
Next, the start opening 2 signal editing process (A7021) in the external information editing process is the one in which "starting opening 1" in the start opening 1 signal editing process is replaced with "starting opening 2", and the detailed description I omit the drawing.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A7022) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs, to an external device, a main prize ball signal generated each time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (here 10). It is a process.

  If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 first updates −1 (A8001). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main winning ball signal output control timer is 0 (A8002).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A 8002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further determines whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 or not. (A8003).

  Then, when the main prize ball signal output number is not 0 (the result of A8003 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball signal output number by -1 (A8004), and the main prize ball signal output The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is saved in the control timer area (A8005). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is a time (for example, 128 msec) obtained by adding the time of the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time of the off state (for example, low level).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves on data for turning on the main winning ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8007), and ends the main winning ball signal editing process. Also, when the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (the result of A8003 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (A8008), the main prize ball signal editing process is finished.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8002 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period or not. (A8006). Note that the main prize ball signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (result of A8006 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the external information of RWM. Save to the data area (A8007). Also, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A8006 is "N"), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is RWM external information output data Save to the area (A8008), and end the main prize ball signal editing process.

[Pattern fixed number signal editing process]
Next, the details of the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (A7023) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the symbol determination number signal editing process. The symbol determination frequency signal editing process is a process of outputting a symbol determination frequency signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to an external device.

  If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, the gaming control apparatus 100 first updates -1 (A 8101). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (A 8102).

  When the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A8102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 further determines whether the number of times the symbol determination frequency signal output is 0 or not. (A8103).

  Then, when the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is not 0 (the result of A8103 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency by -1 (A8104), and the symbol determination frequency signal output The symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value is saved in the control timer (A8105). The symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value is the time which added the time (for example, 256 msec) of the ON state (for example, high level) of the symbol determination frequency signal and the time (for example, 300 msec) for the OFF state (for example, low level) (For example, 556 msec).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves on data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8107), and ends the symbol determination frequency signal editing process. Also, if the number of times the symbol determination number signal output is 0 (the result of A8103 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (A8108), the symbol determination number signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8102 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output on period or not. (A8106). The symbol determination frequency signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 300 msec).

  When the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output on interval (the result of A8106 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs the on data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal to the external information of RWM. Save to the data area (A8107). In addition, when the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (result of A8106 is "N"), the off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is RWM external information output data Save in the area (A8108), and complete the symbol determination number signal editing process.

[Modification of control of game control device]
Below, the modification of control (process) of a game control apparatus is demonstrated. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-described control (processing) of the game control device.

  In the above-described control process (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, etc.), while the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game or special figure 2 variation display game) is fluctuating, the other special figure variation display game When (special figure 2 fluctuation display game or special figure 1 fluctuation display game) becomes a hit result (big hit or small hit), one special figure fluctuation display game is forced to end fluctuation (forced end) by the out result. However, as in the following modified example, in this case, with regard to this one special view variable display game, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the timer is interrupted to derive the game result (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) It is also possible to have the configuration of resuming one special figure fluctuation display game which has been interrupted after the end of the hitting operation related to the other special figure fluctuation display game (after the end of the big hit state or the small hit state).

  In addition, even if the special figure variation display game is interrupted, the variation itself of the special symbol (identification information) is apparently continued in the display device 41 and the special figure variation display unit (the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52). (It is also possible to temporarily stop the variation of the special symbol during the interruption.) When the fluctuation is apparently continued, in another concept, it can be said that the fluctuation time is extended by an amount of time of hit operation (time of big hit state or small hit state) of one special drawing with respect to the other special drawing. .

[Special figure 1 game processing (modification)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special view 1 game process (A1310) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 1 game process according to the modification. FIG. 82 is obtained by adding the process of step S8200 to FIG. The processing from step A3201 to step A3220 in FIG. 82 is the same as that in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted is set (S8200). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is not set (result of S8200 is N), processing from step A3201 to A3220 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (result of S8200 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 does not process step A3201 to A3218, and changes the special figure 1 display 51 After preparing the special view 1 change control table for control (A3219), the symbol change control process according to the special view 1 display 51 is executed (A3220), and the special view 1 game process is ended. Thus, when the special view 1 variation display game is being interrupted, the counting (updating) of the variation time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for counting the variation time is stopped. In the special figure 1 display unit 51, the variation itself of the special symbol is apparently continued by the symbol variation control process.

[Special figure 2 game processing (modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 game process (A1311) described above will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 2 game process according to the modification. FIG. 83 is obtained by adding the process of step S8300 to FIG. The processing of steps A3301 to A3323 in FIG. 83 is the same as that in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether a special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted is set (S8300). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8300 is N), processing from step A3301 to A3323 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (result of S8300 is "Y"), game control control 100 does not process step A3301 to A3321, the fluctuation of special figure 2 indicator 52 After preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for control (A3322), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is ended. In this manner, when the special view 2 variation display game is being interrupted, the counting (updating) of the variation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for counting the variation time is stopped. In the special figure 2 display 52, the change itself of the special symbol is apparently continued by the symbol change control processing.

[Special figure 1 during processing (modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 1 during fluctuation process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing a procedure of the special view 1 during variation processing according to the modification. FIG. 84 is obtained by deleting the processes of steps A5311 to A5319 of FIG. 53 and adding the processes of steps S8411 to S8416. The processes of steps A5301 to A5310 and steps A5320 to A5325 of FIG. 84 are the same as those of FIG.

  When the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not disappointing (in the case of big hit or small hit) and the special figure 2 is in fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed) (A5309 The result is “N” and the result of A5310 is “Y”), and the special view 2 variation display game is interrupted by the processing of steps S8411 to S8416. When the special figure 1 variation display game of the hit result is stopped changing, the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted.

  If the result of the special view 1 change display game is not disappointing and the special view 2 is changing, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special view 2 change display game is disapproval (S8411) . When the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a loss (the result of S8411 is “Y”), whether or not the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (special figure 2 game processing timer = 4 msec) It is determined (S8412). That is, based on the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variation display game. Do.

  When the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (the result of S8412 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 performs the special figure 2 game process (this timer interruption immediately after the special figure 1 game process). The special view 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decreased by 4 msec) to 0, and the special view 2 variation display game can be ended with a release result. Therefore, in this case, since it is not necessary to interrupt the special view 2 variation display game, the processing shifts to step A5324.

  If the result of the special view 2 variation display game is not disapproval (result of S8411 is “N”), or the remaining time of the special view 2 game processing timer is not 4 msec (the result of S8412 is “N ], The special figure 2 game interruption flag which shows that special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game is being suspended is set (S8413). The special view 2 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8300 described above. Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is prepared as a presentation command (S8414), and a presentation command setting process is executed (S8415). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interrupt command can set an effect for interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the special view 2 game processing timer by −1 (decreases 4 msec) (S8416). This is because the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S8413), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated by −1 (decrease of 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process this time. Here, instead, the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by 1 (decreased by 4 msec). This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the special view 2 game processing timer is additionally increased by 4 msec when restarting the interrupted special view 2 variation display game (see FIG. 105).

  After the step S8416, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processes of steps A5320 to A5325 as in FIG. In addition, in the special figure 1 during the variation process according to the modification, unlike the case of FIG. 53, the special process 2 during process transition setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special figure 2 during processing (modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 during fluctuation process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing a procedure of the special figure 2 during variation process according to the modification. FIG. 85 shows the processing of steps A5411 to A5419 of FIG. 54 deleted and the processing of steps S8511 to S8513 added. The processing of steps A5401 to A5410 and steps A5420 to A5425 in FIG. 85 is the same as that in FIG.

  When the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not disappointing (in case of big hit or small hit) and the special figure 1 is in fluctuation (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed) (A5409 The result is “N” and the result of A5410 is “Y”), and the special view 1 variation display game is interrupted by the processing of steps S8511 to S8513. When the special figure 2 variation display game of the hit result stops fluctuating, the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted.

  When the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not disapproval and the special figure 1 is in fluctuation, the game control device 100 displays the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. It sets (S8511). The special view 1 game interruption flag is used in the determination of step S8200 described above. Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is prepared as a presentation command (S8512), and a presentation command setting process is executed (S8513). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 interruption command can set an effect for interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game.

  After the step S8513, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processes of steps A5420 to A5325 as in FIG. Incidentally, in the special figure 2 in-variation process according to the modification, unlike the case of FIG. 54, the special process 1 during process transition setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing (modification example)]
A modification of the special view 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special view 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view 1 jackpot end process according to the modification. FIG. 86 corresponds to FIG. 67 with the processing of steps S8617 to S8621 added. The processing from step A6701 to step A6716 in FIG. 86 is the same as that in FIG.

  After step A6716, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special view 2 variation display game is being interrupted (S8617). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be judged that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variation display game is not being interrupted (the result of S8617 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in RWM is cleared (S8620). The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (S8621), and the special view 1 jackpot end process is ended.

  When the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8617 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces the decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing resumption of the special figure 2 variation display game. The command is prepared (S8618), and the rendering command setting process is executed (S8619). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 resumption command can execute processing for resuming the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set is cleared in the RWM (S8620), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621) , The special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

  By clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the clocking (updating) of the fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) which counts the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is resumed (the result of S8300 is " N "). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being interrupted is resumed.

  The process of step S8621 is the same process as step A6717 of FIG. 67, and the special figure 2 game wait time value starts the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game. It is set to delay (resume) at the time of the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), which is 8 msec which is a double of the interrupt cycle. As a result, in the timer interrupt process after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be resumed simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 fluctuation display game. If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 variation display game is started (restarted) within the current timer interrupt process prior to the special figure 1 variation display game. In addition, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts (restarts) before the special figure 1 fluctuation display game after the big hit state ends, especially when there is no problem in game control, the processing of step A8621 is omitted. It is not necessary to set the special figure 2 game wait time value.

  Further, although the determination of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is the time of the next timer interrupt processing according to the special figure 2 game wait time value, the decoration special figure 2 restart command is set and transmitted first. This is because the processing cycle of the effect control device 300 is longer than that of the game control device 100, and therefore the time for one interruption (4 msec) can be absorbed.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing (modification example)]
A modification of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing according to the modification. FIG. 87 shows the process in FIG. 68 to which steps S8717 to S8720 are added. The processing from step A6801 to step A6816 in FIG. 87 is the same as that in FIG.

  After step A6816, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special view 1 variation display game is being interrupted (S8717). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variation display game is not being interrupted (the result of S8717 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area where the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in RWM is cleared (S8720) 2 Finish the big hit end processing.

  When the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8717 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a decoration special figure 1 restart command for instructing resumption of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. The command is prepared (S8718), and the rendering command setting process is executed (S8719). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 resumption command can execute processing for resuming the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set is cleared in the RWM (S8720), and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

  By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the clocking (updating) of the fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is resumed (the result of S8300 is " N "). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being interrupted is resumed.

  In the special figure 2 big hit end processing, the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set. This is because even if there is no special figure 2 game wait time value, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can both be started (restarted) in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special view 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special view 1 game process will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 1 small hitting end process according to the modification. FIG. 88 is obtained by adding the processing of steps S8810 to S8814 to FIG. The processing of steps A7201 to A7209 in FIG. 72 is the same as that in FIG.

  If the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A7207 is “Y”), or after step A7209, it is determined whether or not the special view 2 variation display game is being interrupted (S8810). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be judged that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not being interrupted (the result of S8810 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag territory is cleared (S8813), the special figure 2 game weight time value (8msec) the special figure 2 game It saves in the processing timer area (S8814), and ends the special figure 1 small hit end processing.

  When the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8810 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces the decoration special figure 2 resumption command for instructing resumption of the special figure 2 variation display game. The command is prepared (S8811), and the rendering command setting process is executed (S8812). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 resumption command can execute processing for resuming the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. Do. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the small hitting state end by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be resumed simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Note that the process of step S8814 is the same process as step A7210 of FIG. Further, by clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being interrupted is resumed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 2 small hitting end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 2 small hitting end process according to the modification. FIG. 89 corresponds to FIG. 73 with the processing of steps S8911 to S8814 added. The processes of steps A7301 to A7210 in FIG. 73 are the same as those in FIG.

  If the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A7308 is “Y”), or after step A7310, it is determined whether or not the special view 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (S8911). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variation display game is not being interrupted (the result of S8911 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hitting end processing is ended.

  When the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8911 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure 1 resumption command as a production command (S8912), and executes the production command setting process. (S8913). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 resumption command can execute processing for resuming the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hitting end processing is ended. By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game being interrupted can be resumed.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which production control device 300 performs with the program for production control is explained. In addition, although control of the production control apparatus 300 is demonstrated as what respond | corresponds to said modification of control of the game control apparatus 100 (composition which restarts the special figure fluctuation display game which was interrupted) on account of description, In the case of a basic configuration (a configuration that is not a modification) for forcibly ending the special view variation display game, the process related to the interruption / resumption of the special view variation display game may be omitted.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main process performed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "B ****".

  When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B1001). Next, initialization of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 is executed (B1002, B1003), and an interrupt is permitted (B1004). When the interruption is permitted, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interruption process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100.

  Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B1002) and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a predetermined period, the WDT times up and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B1009). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process is executed to receive an operation such as a change in the brightness or volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the player (B1011). Then, random number update processing for updating random numbers such as effect random numbers is executed (B1011), the received command received from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed, and the corresponding received command check processing is executed (B1012). Details of the reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display editing processing for updating various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B1013). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within the frame period 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and setting for ending preparation of drawing commands is executed (B1014).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is the frame switching timing (B1015). When it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B 1015 is “N”), the processing of B 1015 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes, and when it is the frame switching timing (the result of B 1015 is “Y”) The screen drawing is instructed (B1016). Since the frame period in the present embodiment is 1/30 second, frame switching is performed when, for example, periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1017).

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) formed of an LED or the like (B1018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (panel effect device 44) such as a motorized product driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1019). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute a bonus game operation presentation.

  Then, when the process of B1019 described above is finished, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B1008. Thereafter, the processing from B1008 to B1019 is repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the details of the received command check process (B1012) in the main process (FIG. 90) described above will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command check process performed by the effect control device 300.

  In order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the command reception number is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (the result of B 1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the reception command check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the number of received commands is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 receives the command reception counter of the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the receive command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, data is not overwritten even if a new command is received during copying.

  Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command readout index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to be able to store up to 32 received commands. The received command is stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31. Here, the received command is read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that at the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command reading index is cleared.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether the copy of the command reception number loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N “), Repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always securing a free area in the reception command buffer without performing analysis directly, it is possible to prepare for mass reception of commands.

  Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents of the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the contents. Processing is executed (B1108) Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 92. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). It is determined whether the analysis of the loaded command reception number has been completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processing of steps B1107 to B1110 is repeated. If the analysis is completed (the result of B 1110 is “Y”), the reception command check process is ended.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 91) described above will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as the MODE portion and the lower byte as the ACTION portion (ACT portion) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 600 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE part (MODE command) and an ACTION part (ACTION command), and is usually transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of command. Ru. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether it is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type) which can be taken by the MODE section indicating the type of command. Then, if the MODE part is in the normal range (the result of B 1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is in the normal range (B 1203). That is, it is determined whether it is a value (value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific rendering instruction or the like). Then, if the ACTION part is in the normal range (the result of B 1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B 1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION part is a possible value of the command of the type specified by the MODE part. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B 1204 is “Y”), command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B 1205.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the fluctuation system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decoration special symbol, and includes variation commands (A5014 and A5015 in FIG. 50). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a variable system command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable system command process is executed (B1206), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a variable system command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of a hit system command (B1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to effects during a big hit or a small hit, for example, a hit symbol command, a round command, a small hit open command, etc. . Then, if the MODE section indicates a hit system command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the hit system command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a hit system command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is in the range of the symbol system command (B1209). It is to be noted that the symbol system commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4316a in FIG. 43A) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4316b in FIG. 43B) corresponding to the stop design pattern. Then, if the MODE section indicates a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol system command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of a one-shot system command (B1211). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a single-shot system command (the result of B 1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command processing is executed (B 1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B 1211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol system command read ahead (B 1213) . The pre-reading symbol system command includes the above-mentioned pre-reading stop symbol command (A3111 in FIG. 31). Then, if the MODE section indicates a pre-reading symbol system command (the result of B 1213 is “Y”), pre-reading symbol system command processing is executed (B 1214), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch symbol system command (the result of B 1213 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (B 1215) ). The prefetch variation system command includes the above-described prefetch variation pattern command (A3115 in FIG. 31). Then, if the MODE portion indicates the prefetch change command (the result of B 1215 is “Y”), the prefetch change command process is executed (B 1216), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch change system command (result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 can receive an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode) Because there is a problem, the reception command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), if the ACTION part is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B 1204 is “N”), and the received command analysis process is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, details of the single-shot system command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 93A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. 93B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half of the one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section indicates a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). Then, if the MODE unit represents a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization etc. is executed (B1304), and the one-shot system command process is performed. finish.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of a power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is “Y”), the power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (when there is a special figure game interruption flag backed up in the RWM), the special drawing command is used in the power failure recovery. A suspended command (suspended command) indicating that the variable display game is suspended or the special view 2 variable display game is suspended is included.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command ( B1307). Then, if the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command or not. (B1309). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 holding information setting process is executed (B 1310), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1309 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command. It is determined whether or not (B1311). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 holding information setting process is executed (B 1312), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command is not transmitted from the game control apparatus 100, so the processing of steps B1311 and B1312 may be omitted. However, even if special figure 2 start memory occurs, special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not start immediately (for example, it does not invalidate the winning a prize to the 2nd start winning opening 37 during the small hitting etc) In the case of), even in the special view start opening 2 switch process (FIG. 30) described above, the special view reserve information determination process (pre-reading process, preliminary determination process) is performed, and the decoration special figure 2 reserve number command from the game control apparatus 100 May be sent.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents the probability information command or not. (B1313). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a probability information command (the result of B 1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting processing is executed (B 1314), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the probability information command (the result of B 1313 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents an error / illegal command ( B1315). As error / illegal commands, for example, fraud occurrence command (A2108), fraud release command (A2116), special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command (A2414), special figure 2 abnormal variation release command (A2418), status off There is a command (A2504) and a status on command (A2507). Then, if the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (the result of B 1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling an error or a false notification is executed (B 1316), End one-shot command processing.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B 1315 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit indicates a command for effect mode switching. It determines (B1317). Then, if the MODE unit indicates a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "Y"), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a command for symbol stop. (B1319). In addition, as commands for symbol stop, there are an ornament special figure 1 stop command and an ornament special figure 2 stop command. Then, if the MODE section indicates a command for symbol stop (the result of B1319 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command is normal (B1320). If the command is not normal (the result of B 1320 is “N”), the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If the command is a normal command (the result of B 1320 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs stop setting for stopping the corresponding special view (special decoration 1 or special decoration 2) (B 1321). Then, when all the special symbols (identification information) of the plurality of variable display areas of the display device 41 are stopped, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state (B1322), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In addition, the gaming state flag is a flag that can indicate other states such as during fluctuation, during a big hit, during a small hit, and the like.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for symbol stop (the result of B1319 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a command for suspension of fluctuation. (B1323). The command for suspension of variation is the above-mentioned decoration special figure 1 interruption command (S8512 of FIG. 85) and the decoration special figure 2 interruption command (S8414 of FIG. 84). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a command for suspension of fluctuation (the result of B1323 is “Y”), the processing for setting suspension of fluctuation is executed (B1324), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for suspension of fluctuation (the result of B1323 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a command for restart of fluctuation. (B1325). The command for resuming fluctuation is the decoration special view 1 restart command (S8718 in FIG. 87) and the decoration special view 2 restart command (S8618 in FIG. 86) described above. Then, if the MODE portion indicates a command for suspension of fluctuation (the result of B 1325 is “Y”), fluctuation restart setting processing is executed (B 1326), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  In addition, even if the command for suspension of fluctuation is not received, if the hit system command regarding the effect of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game of one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is received, The effect control device 300 may automatically determine whether or not the other decorative special-image variation display game is being executed, and perform the variation interruption setting process and the subsequent variation restart setting process.

[Change suspension setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) in the above-described one-shot system command process (FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation interruption setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received command for suspension of fluctuation is a normal command (B1401). If the command is not normal (the result of B 1401 is “N”), the fluctuation interruption setting process is ended. If the command is normal (the result of B 1401 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the command is received at the time of power on (B 1402). If the command is received when the power is turned on (the result of B 1402 is “Y”), the game for displaying the decoration special figure variation game corresponding to the received command (decorative special figure 1 interrupt command or decorative special figure 2 interrupt command) The suspension flag of the decorative special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating that the process is suspended is set (B1403).

  If the effect control device 300 does not receive a command at power-on (the result of B 1402 is “N”), the symbol (special decoration 1 or special decoration 2) to be interrupted is changing. It is determined whether or not the variation display game of the symbol to be interrupted is being executed (B1404). If the symbol of the object is not in motion (the result of B 1404 is “N”), the variation interruption setting process is ended. If the symbol of the object is in motion (the result of B 1404 is “Y”), it is determined whether the received command for suspension of variation is the decoration special figure 1 suspension command (B 1405).

  If the received command for suspension of change is the decoration special view 1 interruption command (the result of B1405 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the fluctuation display for suspension of the special treatment view 1 (B1406). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is largely displayed at the center, the interruption variable display is set such that it moves to a corner and is displayed small and reduced. It is also possible to set an interruption variable display which is displayed in a state of higher transparency than usual. Subsequently, the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 1 indicating that the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1407). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1408).

  If the effect control device 300 is in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the result of the decorative feature 2 variation display game is a big hit (B1409). If the result of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is “N”), the decoration special figure 1 variation display game of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is suggested to indicate the suspension of the decoration figure 1 variation display game with the display device 41 etc. The display setting for the interruption effect is executed (B1410), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is ended.

  If the effect control device 300 is not in the low probability state (the result of B 1408 is “N”), that is, if it is in the high probability state, the effect of the decorative special feature 2 fluctuation display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41 Since the display for the effect for interruption of the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not set, the fluctuation interruption setting process is ended. In addition, when the result of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit (the result of B1409 is “Y”), the decoration 41 is displayed in order to preferentially display the effects of the big hit of the display 2 variation display game. The variation interruption setting process is ended without performing the display setting of the effect for interruption of the special view 1 fluctuation display game.

  On the other hand, when the received command for change suspension is not the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (the result of B 1405 is “N”), that is, when the received command for variation suspension is the decoration special figure 2 interruption command, the decoration special figure 2 is Setting the suspension change display (B1411). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 is greatly enlarged and displayed (main display and normal display) at the center, it moves to a corner and is displayed smaller and smaller The interruption variable display may be set, or the interruption variable display may be set to display in a state of higher transparency than usual. Subsequently, the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 2 indicating that the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1412). And it is determined whether it is a low probability state (B1413).

  If the low probability state (the result of B 1413 is “N”), that is, if the high probability state, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the result of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (B 1414) ). If the result of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B 1414 is “N”), the decoration special figure 2 variation display game of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is suggested to suggest the interruption of the special figure 2 variation display game The display setting of the interruption effect is executed (B1415), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is ended.

  If the effect control device 300 is in the low probability state (the result of B 1413 is “Y”), the effect of the decorative special view 1 fluctuation display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41, so the decorative special view 2 fluctuation is The change interruption setting process is ended without performing the display setting of the effect for interruption of the display game. In addition, when the result of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (the result of B 1414 is “Y”), in order to preferentially display the presentation of the big hit of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the display device 41 The change interruption setting process is ended without performing the display setting of the effect for interruption of the special view 2 fluctuation display game.

[Variation restart setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the details of the fluctuation restart setting process (B1326) in the above-described one-shot system command process (FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation restart setting process performed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received command for fluctuation resumption is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (the result of B1501 is “N”), the fluctuation restart setting process is ended. If the command is a normal command (the result of B 1501 is “Y”), it is determined whether the received command for fluctuation resumption is the decoration special figure 1 resumption command (B 1502).

  If the received command to resume fluctuation is the decoration special figure 1 restart command (the result of B 1502 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 changes the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation based on the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 1 It is determined whether the display game is being interrupted (B1503). If the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is not being interrupted (the result of B 1503 is “N”), the variation restart setting process is ended.

  When the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (the result of B1503 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the interruption special flag of the decorative special figure 1 (B1504). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1505). The power failure recovery display is a display that suggests that the power failure has been recovered and that processing is performed after the power failure recovery. If the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1505 is "Y"), change fluctuation resumption of the decoration special figure 1 for restoration according to the probability status (resumption of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game for restoration) is set To do (B1506). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1505 is "N"), resumption (not for recovery) of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game according to the probability state is set (B1507).

  On the other hand, if the received command to resume fluctuation is not the decoration special figure 1 restart command (the result of B1502 is “N”), that is, the decoration special figure 2 restart command, the effect control device 300 displays the decoration special figure 2 It is determined whether or not the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is suspended based on the suspension flag of (B1508). When the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is not being interrupted (the result of B1508 is “N”), the variation restart setting process is ended.

  The effect control device 300 clears the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 2 (B1509) when the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted (the result of B1508 is "Y"). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (restoration screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1510). If the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1510 is "Y"), change fluctuation resumption of the decoration special figure 2 for restoration according to the probability state (resumption of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game for restoration) is set (B1511). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1510 is "N"), the resumption (not for recovery) of the decorative special figure 2 variation display game according to the probability state is set (B1512).

  With regard to the processing of steps B1506, B1507, B1511, and B1512, there is a possibility that the probability state has changed between when the suspension of the decorative feature variation display game is started and when it is resumed. Therefore, at the time of resumption, the display mode of the symbols differs depending on whether or not it is a probability state of preferentially displaying the target symbols. For example, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted during the low probability, the reduced symbol of the special figure 1 continues to fluctuate in the corner of the display device 41, but if it is low probability even when resuming, the special figure 1 Is resumed in a state of being preferentially displayed in the center of the display device 41. If it is high probability / time saving state at the time of resumption, it resumes with the reduced design (reduced display).

[Ahead reading symbol system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the details of the prefetch symbol system command processing (B1214) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the latest hold information is information of special view 1 hold (special view 1 start storage), for example, the latest received decoration special view hold number command is the number of special view 1 hold It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is information of special view 1 hold (the result of B 1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) to the special view 1 look ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special view 1 hold count Save (B1602).

  If the latest hold information is not the information of the special view 1 hold (the result of B 1601 is “N”), that is, the decoration special view hold number command received most recently is the decoration special view 2 hold number command In the case, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area which corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command is not transmitted from the game control apparatus 100, so the process of step B1603 is not basically executed. However, even if special figure 2 start memory occurs, special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not start immediately (for example, it does not invalidate the winning a prize to the 2nd start winning opening 37 during the small hitting etc) In the case (a), the game control device 100 may transmit the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command, and the process of step B1603 may be executed.

  After steps B 1602 and B 1603, the effect control device 300 sets a prefetch fluctuation system command reception wait flag indicating that the reception of the prefetch fluctuation system command is awaited (B 1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variation system command are set, so the pre-reading variation system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the pre-reading symbol system command processing ends.

[Read-ahead change system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, details of the prefetch change system command processing (B1215) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch change system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not waiting for the reception of the prefetch change system command (B1701). When the above-described read-ahead change system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the reception of a read-ahead change system command is being awaited. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch change command (the result of B 1701 is “N”), the prefetch change command processing is ended. If waiting for the reception of the prefetch change command (the result of B 1701 is “Y”), the read change flag for the prefetch change command is cleared (B 1702).

  Next, the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) sets a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holdings of the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest hold information (B1703). The sub-prediction change command MODE portion is acquired corresponding to the MODE portion (B1704). Next, the pre-reading fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the in-sub pre-reading fluctuation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the pre-reading fluctuation system command is acquired (B1706).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the in-sub-prediction change command MODE part and the ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to other than 0. When the converted MODE part and ACT part are both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds The file is saved in the read ahead change command area (the special view look ahead change command area or the special view 2 look ahead change command area) (B1708). Then, the pre-read command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is judged whether or not the combination of the converted MODE portion and ACT portion is normal (B1710).

  It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes according to the number of reservations when holding starts the variable display game. When the suspension starts the variable display game, if there is no other suspension, it becomes the longer first half fluctuation, and if the new suspension occurs and the number of reservations is large, it becomes the shorter first half fluctuation. Therefore, the MODE portion of the received prefetch change system command is converted into the in-sub-prediction change command MODE portion so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled the same even if the time value of the first half change is transitioned.

  In addition, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second-half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub-prediction fluctuation command ACT portion does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there is also a kind of reach of the same system, if the effect control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the second half fluctuation) of the pre-reading fluctuation system command, the number increases and the check becomes difficult . For example, normal reach also includes types such as normal reach-1 stop and normal reach + 1 stop. Therefore, the ACT part indicating the reach of the same system is converted into the same sub inner pre-reading fluctuation command ACT part, thereby reducing the number and reducing the burden of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing.

  Next, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-prediction change command MODE unit and ACT unit) is 0, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B 1710 is “N”), it is regarded that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the prefetch change system command processing is ended.

  If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (the result of B 1710 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold that occurred most recently is out (B 1711) . In the case where the latest hold is a hit (the result of B 1711 is “N”), the effect control device 300 calculates the total time until the latest held special figure change display game ends the change (B 1712). The total time also includes the display time of the stop symbol.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is to be interrupted at the end of fluctuation of the latest reserve special drawing fluctuation display game (B1713). If the latest hold is the special view 1 hold, the other decorative special view variation display game is the decorative special view 2 variation display game. Here, for example, after the calculated total time, when the other decoration special figure variation display game is not executed or when the other decoration special figure variation display game is out of variation, the other decoration special figure variation display game Determine not to interrupt.

  In a case where the other decoration special figure variation display game is to be interrupted (the result of B1713 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a plan to execute pre-reading effect for suspension suspension (B1714). In addition, suspension suspension is suspension corresponding to the decoration special figure change display game suspended. In addition, having an execution schedule includes that pre-reading effect is being executed. If there is a scheduled execution of pre-reading effect for suspension suspension (the result of B1714 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect of suspension suspension is suspension change notification (B1715).

  If the pre-reading effect for suspension and suspension is not the suspension change notice (the result of B1715 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the effect replacement for the pre-selection effect for suspension and suspension is in time (B1716). If it is impossible for the pre-reading effect to have already progressed and forced to end, it is determined that the effect replacement is not in time (the replacement is not performed). If the effect replacement is in time (the result of B1716 is “Y”), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the prefetch change command area corresponding to the number of holdings so as to replace the effect (B1717).

  In the case where the effect control device 300 does not interrupt the other decorative special feature variation display game (the result of B 1713 is “N”), the suspension control is suspended (the result of B 1711 is “Y”). If there is no scheduled execution of the pre-reading effect for the result (the result of B1714 is “N”), if the pre-reading effect of suspension pending is the pending change notice (the result of B1715 is “Y”), if the effect replacement is not in time (B1716 As a result, the process directly proceeds to the process of step B1718 without replacing the effect.

  Next, the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (information of the latest hold) to be prefetched from the read-ahead change command area (B1718), and executes a prefetch lottery process regarding the latest hold prefetch effect (B1719). Subsequently, it is judged whether or not the latest hold-down advance notice effect occurs (B1720). If the latest hold previewing advance notice effect occurs (the result of B 1720 is “Y”), it is determined whether the generated advance notice notice effect is an effect that starts immediately (B 1721). There are, for example, pending change notices in the effect that starts immediately. If the pre-reading advance notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B 1721 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B 1722). Then, the prefetch change command processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the preview control effect of the latest hold is not generated (the result of B 1720 is “N”), or the effect control device 300 is not the effect that the preview sound effect of the occurrence occurs immediately starts (the result of B 1721 is “N”). ), As it is. End the read ahead variation command processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special view reservation information determination process (prefetching process, prior determination process) is not performed in the special view start port 2 switch process, so the special view 2 start storage (special figure 2 hold) On the other hand, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) and the pre-reading variation system command (pre-reading variation pattern command) are not transmitted from the game control apparatus 100. Therefore, the processes of steps B1715 to B1717 are basically not executed. However, even if special figure 2 start memory occurs, special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not start immediately (for example, it does not invalidate the winning a prize to the 2nd start winning opening 37 during the small hitting etc) In this case, the game control device 100 transmits the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variation system command for the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 hold), and the processes of steps B1711 to B1717 are executed. Good.

[Design system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the symbol system command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets the special view type corresponding to the MODE portion of the received symbol system command (the special decoration 1 command or the special decoration 2 command) (B1801). The special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of symbols changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a table is used for each MODE to set the symbol type. In the present embodiment, the symbol types are the above-mentioned off symbol, 2R positive variation symbol, 4R positive variation symbol, 8R positive variation symbol, and 16R positive variation symbol.

[Variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special view type (special view 1 or special view 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is unconfirmed (B1901). If the special drawing type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variation system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and it is determined whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, "mismatch" means contradiction in rendering, for example, when a symbol system command of a probability variation symbol has been received although a variation system command of an off-set has been received. If the variation system command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B 1903 is “Y”), variation system command processing ends.

  If the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1904), and performs the effect during variation The variation effect setting process to be set is executed (B1905). Note that multiple effects exist for the same variable system command. Subsequently, the special view variation is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Change production setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the details of the fluctuation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-mentioned fluctuation system command process (FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the change pattern type is change without reach (change that does not reach reach) (B2001). If the change pattern type is no reach change (the result of B2001 is "Y"), set the model code, special view type, first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to effect mode (B2002), change system command ( The address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command) and the number of reservations of the special view type is acquired (B2003). In the case of no reach fluctuation, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, the table address corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

If the variation pattern type is not reach change (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is reach change, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, the first half corresponding to the symbol type The advance notice distribution group address table is set (B2004), and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE portion of the change system command (change command) and the change pattern type is acquired (B2005).

  After the steps B 2003 and B 2005, the effect control device 300 performs a drawing of a notice that appears during the first half of the movement (before reaching) (B 2006). Then, set the model code, special figure type, effect mode, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type (B2007), and the second half notice distribution group table address corresponding to the ACT part of the variation system command Acquired (B2008), and perform a lottery for notice appearing in the second half of the year (during reach) (B2009). Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and the main reach contents etc. are known from the fluctuation system command.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). Thereafter, in accordance with the contents of the change production such as the reach production and the content of the notice production, the stop symbol of the decorative special view variable display game is determined (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the scattered eyes in the case of the off pattern

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B2013). If the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B2013 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2015. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation relates to the symbol that is the main display (B2014). In addition, this fluctuation is a decoration special figure fluctuation display game executed by this fluctuation system command. For example, when the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is greatly enlarged (normal display) at the center of the display device 41, the special figure 1 is the main display.

  The effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the change effect (B2015) and performs the display setting of the notice effect when the current change relates to the symbol that is the main display (the result of B2014 is “Y”). (B2016). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special view type is performed (B2017), and the voice number defining the effect mode by the speaker and the decoration number determining the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B2018).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B2019), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols varying with the display device 41 When the (fourth symbol) is present, display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special drawing type is performed (B2020). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by an LED other than the display device 41.

  On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 is displaying the power failure recovery display (the result of B2013 is "Y"), and when the fluctuation is not related to the symbol that is the main display (the result of B2014 is " N ”), that is, when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation during the power failure recovery display and relates to a symbol displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the display device 41, a fluctuation effect or a notice effect effect not to perform a flashy effect The display setting of the decorative special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special drawing type is performed (B2019) without performing the setting of (etc., B2015 to B2018).

[Modification of control of effect control device]
Below, the modification of control (process) of a presentation control apparatus is demonstrated. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-described control (processing) of the effect control device.

[Variation interruption setting processing (modification example)]
A modification of the above-mentioned fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation interruption setting process according to the modification. In FIG. 101, the processing of steps B1402, B1403, B1410 and B1415 is deleted from FIG. 94, and the processing of steps T2115, T2116, T2117 and T2118 is added. In FIG. 101, the same processes as in FIG. 94 are assigned the same step numbers (symbols) and the description thereof is omitted.

  The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 interrupt command is in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “Y”), and the result of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is “N”), the display is performed to set the freeze display of the effect during the variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (T2115). The effects during fluctuation include the above-mentioned fluctuation effects and advance notice effects. The freeze is, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving image). Here, display setting of a series of movies up to freezing may be performed. Subsequently, display setting of a superimposed video image (such as a movie display of a character or the like) for freeze effect to be displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2116).

  Also, the effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interrupt command is not in the low probability state (the result of B 1413 is “N”), and the result of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (B1414 The result is “N”), and the display is performed to set the freeze display of the effect during the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (T2117). The effects during fluctuation include the above-mentioned fluctuation effects and advance notice effects. The freeze is, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving image). Here, display setting of a series of movies up to freezing may be performed. Subsequently, display setting of a superimposed image for freeze effect to be displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2118)

  In the above, the freeze special effects are performed after the decoration special figure interruption command is received, but effects are performed before the decoration special figure interruption command is received based on the pre-reading system command, and the decoration special figure interruption command reception At the same time, it may freeze the game to enhance the interest.

[Variation restart setting process (modification)]
A modification of the above-mentioned change restart setting process (B1326) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation restart setting process according to the modification. FIG. 102 includes the processing of steps T2210 to T2215 and T2216 to T2221 in place of the processing of steps B1505 to B1507 and B1510 to B1512 of FIG. In FIG. 102, the same processes as in FIG. 95 are assigned the same step numbers (symbols) and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  After step B1504, the effect control device 300 sets the resumption of fluctuation of the decoration special figure 1 (resumption of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game) according to the probability state (T2210). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2211). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2211 is "Y"), the fluctuation restart (restart of the decoration special game 1 fluctuation display game) of the decoration special figure 1 with the reduced design (reduction display) is set (T2212) ).

  The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time or more, when the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of T2211 is "N") T2213). If the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2213 is “Y”), display setting of the rewind effect and setting of the reproduction speed are performed (T2214), and the fluctuation resumption setting processing is ended. Note that the rewind effect is performed by the display device 41 at the fast reproduction speed again before the interruption of the decorative figure 1 fluctuation display game. If the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (result of T2213 is "N"), the time for rewind effect is insufficient, and the display of restart effect using the electric role and the setting of the feature drive are performed (T2215) ), End the fluctuation restart setting process.

  After the step B1509, the decoration special figure 2 resumption command effect control device 300 sets the fluctuation resumption of the decoration special figure 2 (resumption of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game) according to the probability state (T2216). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2217). If display of the power failure recovery display is in progress (the result of T2217 is "Y"), change fluctuation resumption of decoration special figure 2 (reduction of decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game) with the reduced symbol (reduction display) is set (T2218 ).

  If the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of T2217 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (T2219). If the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2219 is "Y"), display setting of the rewind effect and setting of the reproduction speed are performed (T2220), and the fluctuation resumption setting processing is ended. Note that the rewind effect is performed by the display device 41 at the fast reproduction speed again before the interruption of the decorative figure 2 variation display game. If the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2219 is "N"), the time for rewind effect is insufficient, and the display of restart effect using the electric role and the role drive setting are performed (T2221 ), End the fluctuation restart setting process.

[Function effect]
The operation and effects of the present embodiment (including the modification) will be described below with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 103 to 110. In FIG. 103 to FIG. 110, the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are respectively abbreviated as a special view 1 game and a special view 2 game.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed on the display device based on the establishment of the start condition. When the predetermined result mode (a hit result mode including a small hit result mode and a big hit result mode) is obtained, it is possible to generate a predetermined gaming state (small hit state, big hit state) capable of giving a game value to the player.

  The special view 1 game process as the first control means executes the special view 1 variation display game (first variation display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning on the first start winning opening 36) Take control. The special figure 2 game processing as the second control means executes the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second fluctuation display game) based on the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning on the second start winning opening 37) Take control.

  Both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be in a running state (execution state). Then, when one of the variable display games in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is in the hit result mode (predetermined result mode), the other variable display game is ended and the other change game is performed. The display game may be set as an out result mode (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, FIG. 56A, and FIG. 56B). This makes it possible to prevent both the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game from becoming a hit result mode. In addition, if both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are hit and stopped in the result mode, the gaming machine 10 performs the hitting operation related to one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. The problem occurs because you can only execute.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 103, the process (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, FIG. 55A, FIG. 55B) of stopping the fluctuation display of one fluctuation display game in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 103) is executed. At the same time, it is possible to execute processing for forcibly ending the variable display of the other variable display game in the out-of-result mode (FIGS. 53, 54, 56A, and 56B). Thereby, it is possible to continue the other variable display game as much as possible. Also, a new variation display game is not started until a predetermined gaming state (small hit status, big hit status) that occurs when one of the variation display games is in a hit result mode (the special view 1 of FIG. 35) Normal processing, special figure 2 normal processing in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the failure that the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game both become hit result modes.

  Also, as in the time chart of FIG. 104, when one variation display game is in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 104), the execution time (variation time) of the other variation display game is timed (measured The other variable display game may be interrupted by stopping the update of the special figure game processing timer (clocking means)) (the variation of FIG. 82, FIG. 83, FIG. 84, and FIG. 85). When the predetermined gaming state that occurs when one of the variable display games is in the hit result mode is ended, the other variable display game can be resumed by resuming the update of the special figure game processing timer (clocking means) (FIG. 82) , FIGS. 83 and 86 to 89)). As indicated by the hatched portion in FIG. 104, the other fluctuation display game after resumption can be executed for the remaining fluctuation time after interruption (the remaining time of the timer).

  Moreover, since it is possible to resume even if the other variable display game is interrupted, it is different from the case where the game is forcibly stopped in the out-of-out result mode, and when the other variable display game results in a hit result, the other fluctuation after the restart. It is possible to generate a predetermined gaming state (small hit state, big hit state) by the display game, and it is possible to prevent a failure that the player's profit is lost. For example, when one variable display game derives a small hit result mode while the other variable display game being a big hit result mode is being executed, the other variable display game is interrupted, but a small hit game by one variable display game When the state is over, the other variable display game can be resumed to derive a jackpot result mode.

  Furthermore, when executing the process of hitting the variable display of one variable display game and stopping it in the result mode, the other variable display game is executed as much as possible in order to execute the process of interrupting the variable display of the other variable display game. Can continue. During the suspension of the other variable display game, if the identification information of the other variable display game is variably displayed, the apparent fluctuation can be continued, so that the player does not feel discomfort.

  The game control program (game control program) stored in the storage means (ROM 111b) of the game control means (game control apparatus 100) includes a main process and a timer interrupt process for the main process. Note that this embodiment can be applied to other interrupt processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. In the same timer interrupt process, the special figure 1 game process (first control means, first control process) has priority over the special figure 2 game process (second control means, second control process), and the special figure 1 game After the processing, special figure 2 game processing is executed.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105 (a), when the special view 1 change display game is hit and the special view 2 change display game is interrupted, the special view 2 game process (FIG. 83) is performed. Since the game processing timer can not be updated, the special figure 2 game processing timer (clocking means) for measuring the execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is updated for the time (4 msec) of one interruption cycle (step A8416 in FIG. 84). ). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the special view 2 variation display game after the restart of variation is executed extra for the time of one interrupt cycle. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105 (b), when this timer is not updated, one interrupt cycle is used for the entire fluctuation time (t1 before interruption + t2 after interruption) when updating is performed. The whole fluctuation time will increase by the time of batch (4 msec). On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variation display game is hit and the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted as a result mode, there is no need to update the timer for measuring the execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 106 (a), the predetermined game state (small hit game state in FIG. 106) that occurs when the special view 2 variation display game is hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 106) is When ending, the restart of the special view 1 variation display game is not delayed by a delay timer (delay means) for a predetermined time (wait time) (FIGS. 87 and 89). On the other hand, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 106 (b), when the special game 1 variation display game is hit and the predetermined game state which occurs when the game results in being finished, the restart of the special figure 2 variation display game is delayed timer ( The delay means) delays the predetermined time (wait time of 8 msec) (S8621 in FIG. 86, S8814 in FIG. 88). By setting the delay timer, it is possible to restart the special figure 2 variation display game at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variation display game in timer interrupt processing after the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game.

  Also, as in the time chart of FIG. 107 (a), the special figure 2 variation display game does not depend on the state of the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game (stop state, apparent variation state during suspension, etc.). A delay timer (wait time of 8 msec) may be set. In this way, within the timer interrupt process that performs the ending process of the predetermined gaming state (the closing process of FIG. 67, FIG. 72, FIG. 86, and FIG. 88) that occurs when the special view 1 variation display game is hit and results. The special figure 2 variation display game by special figure 2 game processing can not be started (FIG. 33, FIG. 83). Then, if the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in the timer interrupt process after the predetermined game state end process, the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process are executed. The variable display game and the special view 2 variable display game can be started at the same time. In addition, when the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory already exist at the timing of the termination process of the specified gaming state (when it is configured to store the special figure 2 start memory), or at this timing, the first start When there is a winning on the winning opening 36 and a winning on the second start winning opening 37, the first starting condition and the second starting condition are satisfied.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 107 (b), when the special view 2 variation display game is in a hit result mode, the timer interrupt process after the predetermined game state end process is performed without setting the delay timer. If the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in the special feature 1 game processing and the special feature 2 game processing, the special feature 1 fluctuation display game and the special feature 2 fluctuation display game are started simultaneously it can.

  Furthermore, when one variable display game is stopped in a hit result mode among the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the rest of the other variable display game with respect to the other variable display game. A process corresponding to the fluctuation time (the value of the special figure game processing timer) may be performed (S8412 in FIG. 84). In this case, it is possible to prevent the situation in which both the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game end at the same timing and at the same time derive a hit result.

  For example, based on the remaining fluctuation time of the other fluctuation display game, the other fluctuation display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as one fluctuation display game that stops in the hit result mode. It is determined whether or not (S8412 in FIG. 84). Specifically, in the special figure 2 game process executed after the special figure 1 game process of causing the special figure 1 variation display game to hit and stop in the result mode, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game can be 0 It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation processing is performed to determine whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec.

  In the case where there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variation display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variation display game stops in the hit result mode, the special figure 2 variation display game If the result mode of is the hit result mode, the interruption process of interrupting the suspension of the fluctuation display by interrupting the fluctuation figure display game is suspended in the special drawing 1 game processing (processing of special figure 1 fluctuation in FIG. 84). If the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game is the removal result mode, the special figure 2 variation display game is removed within the special figure 2 game processing (especially, the special figure 2 variation processing in FIG. 85). Perform processing to stop.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108 (a), the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted in a situation where both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game have the possibility of hitting the result substantially simultaneously. And suspension processing can be performed to postpone suspension of the variable display. Then, the derivation of the hit result of the special view 1 change display game is prioritized, and the hit state (hit operation) by the special view 1 change display game starts first. After the end of the hit state by the special view 1 change display game, the hit result of the special view 2 change display game is derived (apparent change display during suspension is stopped), the hit state by the special view 2 change display game ( Since the operation is started, the player is not disadvantaged. It should be noted that the special figure 1 variation display game can not be started even if there is a special figure 1 start memory (special figure 1 suspension) during the hit state (hit operation) by the special figure 2 variation display game (Result of A3501 in FIG. 35) Is “N”).

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108 (b), the special figure 2 variation display game ends at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variation display game for deriving the hit result (here, small hit). In the case where there is a possibility, if the result mode of the special view 2 variation display game is the removal result mode, the special view 2 variation display game is stopped as it is in the removal result mode. There is no problem even if this missing result mode is derived as it is. When performing a process to stop the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the falling out result mode, the stop display time of the falling out result mode (the time from the stop to the determination of the falling off result), the hit result of the special drawing 1 fluctuation display game If the setting is made the same as the stop display time of the mode (the time from the stop to the determination of the hit result (fan fare start)), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Also, as shown in the time charts of FIG. 109 and FIG. 110, the game control apparatus 100 (game control means) performs power failure recovery when power failure is restored and power failure is restored (power on) while the other variation display game is interrupted. After recovery (at the time of recovery or after recovery), before the execution control of one of the variable display games starts, the suspension control command (suspended command) indicating that the other variable display game is being interrupted is the effect control device 300 (effect control means) may be transmitted (A 1022 in FIG. 9B, B 1305 in FIG. 93A). The effect control device 300 can grasp that the other variable display game is suspended and the one variable display game is in the hit state (during the hit operation) by the command during suspension, with regard to the decoration special figure of one of the variable display games Corresponding processing can be performed, such as processing for displaying a winning symbol on the display device 41 (see recovery screen display 1 in FIGS. 109 and 110).

  When the power failure is recovered, the effect control device 300 may display a recovery screen (a power failure recovery display) indicating the recovery of the power failure on the display device 41. Then, if the decoration special view variation display game displayed in the main display (first display) is interrupted, the command related to the control of the decoration special view variation display game which has been interrupted after recovery of the power failure When the (command) is received, the recovery screen may be ended. As commands relating to the control of the decoration special figure variation display game, for example, a variation command related to the start of the decoration special figure variation display game (refer to FIG. 109), an decoration special figure stop command regarding stopping the decoration special figure variation display game (figure 110) and the like. When receiving a command (command) related to the control of the decoration special view variable display game on the side (reduced display side, second display side) displayed in a size different from the main display, the recovery screen is not ended.

  When returning to the normal screen after the end of the recovery screen by the decoration special figure stop command, the off stop design may be a default break. In the case of the hit stop symbol, it may be a default hit symbol according to the game value (such as the number of rounds) of the hit state. The background of the normal screen may correspond to a probability state or the like.

  Before the command related to the control of the decoration special figure variation display game on the main display is received, the command related to the control of the decoration special figure variation display game on the non-main display side (reduced display side) may be received However, at that time, if the recovery screen is ended, a problem may occur. For example, if the recovery screen is ended and the normal screen is displayed at the start of the decoration special view variation display game which is being displayed in a reduced manner even though the probability is low, the player is notified that There is a risk of misidentification. Therefore, as in the restoration screen display 2 of FIGS. 109 and 110, even if a command related to the start of a new change of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game (here, the decoration special figure 2) being displayed in a reduced size is received Only start the display, do not exit the recovery screen.

  The start storage means (for example, the game control apparatus 100) stores the execution right of the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game as a start storage based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition. It is possible. The start storage display control means (for example, the segment LED editing process of FIG. 75 and the main process of FIG. 90) is configured to display the number of start stores stored in the start storage means as a predetermined start storage display area of the display device or display. It is possible to notify the player by displaying on the screen. Then, the effect control device 300 normally displays the number of start memories and the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display game resumed after interruption in the restoration screen after restoration on the display device 41 (in the case other than the display of the restoration screen). It may be displayed in a state of higher transparency. When the apparent variation display is continued even during the interruption, the variation display continued during the interruption may also be displayed in a state of high transparency. Further, in the recovery screen, the fluctuation display displayed in the main display may be regarded as the fluctuation fluctuation.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and alterations are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is apparent that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, according to the present invention, the V prize winning opening can be opened by winning a prize in a kind 1 dual type mixing machine (ie special figure 2 start winning prize opening, and the special figure 2 jackpot of this embodiment is equivalent to a prize winning in a V prize opening. It is applicable also to the big hit (per V) type). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the claims.

10 game machine 12 front frame (play slot)
25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first starting winning opening (first starting winning area)
37 2nd start winning opening (2nd starting winning area)
38 1st Special Variation Winning Device 39 2nd Special Variation Winning Device 40 Center Case 41 Display Unit 44 Panel Effect Unit 46 Panel Decoration Unit 50 Batch Display Unit (LED)
100 gaming control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 effect control device (sub board)
400 power supply

Claims (2)

The game value is given to the player when the game control means is capable of executing a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the display device based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a hit result mode. In a gaming machine capable of generating a predetermined applicable gaming state,
The game control means
First control means for performing execution control of the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition;
And second control means for performing execution control of the second variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition,
Both the first variable display game by the first control means and the second variable display game by the second control means can be in a running state.
In the case where one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is in the hit result mode, the updating of the time counting means for measuring the execution time of the other variable display game is stopped. , Interrupt the other variable display game,
When the predetermined gaming state which occurs when the one variable display game is in the hit result mode is ended, the other variable display game is resumed by resuming the updating of the clock means.
When executing the process of hitting the variable display of the one variable display game and stopping it in the result mode, the process of interrupting the variable display of the other variable display game is executed.
Configuring a game control program including interrupt processing to execute execution control of the second control means after execution control of the first control means,
When the first variable display game is a hit result mode and the second variable display game is interrupted, the time counting means for measuring the execution time of the second variable display game is updated for only one interruption cycle. ,
On the other hand, when the second variable display game is a hit result mode and the first variable display game is interrupted, the clocking means for counting the execution time of the first variable display game is not updated. Machine. The game value is given to the player when the game control means is capable of executing a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the display device based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a hit result mode. In a gaming machine capable of generating a predetermined applicable gaming state,
The game control means
First control means for performing execution control of the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition;
And second control means for performing execution control of the second variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition,
Both the first variable display game by the first control means and the second variable display game by the second control means can be in a running state.
If one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is in the hit result mode, the other variable display game is ended, and the other variable display game is set as the out result mode. ,
The other variation display game is not started until the predetermined game state which occurs when the one variation display game is in the hit result mode is ended,
A process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other variable display game in the processing when executing the process of hitting the variable display of the one variable display game and stopping in a result mode ; And a process of setting an output of a signal for notifying an external device that a stop symbol of the variable display game has been determined .

Images